<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Cttxg</id>
	<title>MoodleDocs - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Cttxg"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/Special:Contributions/Cttxg"/>
	<updated>2026-05-10T01:41:23Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.43.5</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Wiki_settings&amp;diff=107899</id>
		<title>Wiki settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Wiki_settings&amp;diff=107899"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T02:48:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Wiki}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding a wiki==&lt;br /&gt;
*With the editing turned on, in the section you wish to add your wiki, click the &amp;quot;Add an activity or resource&amp;quot; link (or, if not present, the &amp;quot;Add an activity&amp;quot; drop down menu )and choose &#039;&#039;Wiki&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
*This will take you to the wiki settings page titled &amp;quot;Adding a new wiki&amp;quot;. All settings may expanded by clicking the &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; link top right.&lt;br /&gt;
*In an existing wiki, the wiki settings can be found in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Wiki administration &amp;gt; Edit settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:wikigeneral25.png|thumb|General settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Wiki name===&lt;br /&gt;
*The name you give to your wiki here will appear as the link on the course page for your students to click.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Wiki description===&lt;br /&gt;
*Explain the purpose of your wiki here. (This description may or may not be compulsory depending on your admin&#039;s settings.)&lt;br /&gt;
====Display description on course page====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this box is checked, then the description you added above will appear with the wiki link on the course page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Wiki mode===&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose between &amp;quot;Individual wiki&amp;quot; where each student gets their own, or &amp;quot;Collaborative wiki&amp;quot; where students work together on a single wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
===First page name===&lt;br /&gt;
*The name you add here will form the first page of your new wiki. It is a required field and once  a name has been entered,it can&#039;t be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
==Format==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by defaul)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:wikiformat25.png|thumb|Wiki format settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default format===&lt;br /&gt;
*Set the default type of editing your wiki will use. Chooose from&lt;br /&gt;
**HTML - editing using the normal text editor&lt;br /&gt;
**Creole - a popular wiki editing language. If this is selected, a small editing toolbar will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:creolenwiki.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
**NWiki - a wiki editing language used in the contributed NWiki module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Force format===&lt;br /&gt;
If you check this box then students cannot choose their own method of editing the wiki.&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]] &lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access/Activity completion==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These settings are visible if [[Conditional activities]] and [[Activity completion]] have been enabled in the site and the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locally assigned roles==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt; Wiki administration &amp;gt; Locally assigned roles&#039;&#039; selected users can be given additional roles in the activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wiki permissions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Role permissions for the activity can be changed in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Wiki administration &amp;gt; Permissions&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/293p7T55OHA MoodleBites for Teachers - Moodle 2.0 Wiki (part 1)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube   &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/AXPPUbv-b3Y MoodleBites for Teachers - Moodle 2.0 Wiki (part 2)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Ajouter/modifier un wiki]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Wiki anlegen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:Wikiを追加/編集する]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Roles_and_permissions&amp;diff=107898</id>
		<title>Roles and permissions</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Roles_and_permissions&amp;diff=107898"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T02:44:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Managing a Moodle site}}&lt;br /&gt;
A role is a collection of permissions defined for the whole system that you can assign to specific users in specific contexts. The combination of roles and context define a specific user&#039;s ability to do something on any page.  The most common examples are the roles of student and teacher in the context of a course. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Managing roles]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Assign roles]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Roles settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Using roles]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Standard roles]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Creating custom roles]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Permissions]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Override permissions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/7W08wDSWUa4 Moodle 2 Users, Permissions]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Roles FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Roles]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Roles y permisos]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Rolak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Rôles et permissions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:ロールおよびケイパビリティ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Rollen und Rechte]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Managing_accounts&amp;diff=107897</id>
		<title>Managing accounts</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Managing_accounts&amp;diff=107897"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T02:40:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Managing a Moodle site}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can perform various tasks relating to user accounts in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Accounts&#039;&#039;. The links below provide more information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Browse list of users]] - how to search for, find and edit user accounts&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Bulk user actions]] - how to message, confirm, download or perform other actions on a  large group of users globally&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Add a new user]] - how to create one individual user account&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Upload users]] - how to  bulk create new user accounts&lt;br /&gt;
* [[User pictures]] - how to bulk upload profile pictures for users&lt;br /&gt;
* [[User profile fields]] -  how to create customised profile fields&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/bTsHsXOYDQc Moodle 2.0 User Accounts]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Accounts FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Nutzerverwaltung]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=URL_resource_settings&amp;diff=107896</id>
		<title>URL resource settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=URL_resource_settings&amp;diff=107896"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T02:29:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{URL}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding a URL resource to your course==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn editing on.&lt;br /&gt;
#From the the &amp;quot;Add an activity or resource&amp;quot; link (or, if not present, the &amp;quot;Add a resource&amp;quot; drop down menu),choose URL. All settings may expanded by clicking the &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; link top right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:urlgeneral25.png|thumb|General settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
===Name===&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever you type here will form the link learners click on to view the URL so it is helpful to give it a name that suggests its purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
Add a description of your page here. Click &amp;quot;Show editing tools&amp;quot; to display the rich text editor, and drag the bottom right of the text box out to expand it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Display description on the course page===&lt;br /&gt;
If this box is ticked, the description will appear on the course page just below the name of the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Content==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Url.png|thumb|External URL field expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Either enter the URL in the external URL field or click the &amp;quot;Choose a link&amp;quot; button to open the file picker and choose a URL YouTube, Picasa etc (depending on which [[Repositories|repositories]] are enabled for the site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Appearance==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:urlappearance25.png|thumb|Appearance settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
===Display===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Automatic&#039;&#039; - Make the best guess at what should happen (probably what is wanted 99% of the time).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Embed&#039;&#039; - Show the Moodle page with heading, blocks and footer. Show the title/description of the item and display the file directly in the page as well&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Open&#039;&#039; - No Moodle heading, blocks, footer or description - just show the file in the web browser (e.g. shows image, PDF, flash animation, taking up the whole browser window)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;In pop-up&#039;&#039; - Same as &#039;Open&#039;, but opens a new browser window to show this file (without the Moodle heading, blocks, etc) - this browser window also does not have all the menus and address bar in it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above options are the default display options. Additional display options (see below) may be enabled by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; URL&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
===Pop-up width/height===&lt;br /&gt;
If your URL is to be displayed in a pop-up, specify the width and height here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Display URL name/description===&lt;br /&gt;
To show the resource name and/or description when clicking to access the URL, simply tick the appropriate checkboxes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==URL variables==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:urlvariables25.png|thumb|URL variables settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thissection allows you to pass internal information as part of the URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful if the URL is actually an interactive web page that takes parameters, and you want to pass something like the name of the current user, for example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]] &lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access/Activity completion==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These settings are visible if [[Conditional activities]] and [[Activity completion]] have been enabled in the site and the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Drag and Drop a URL==&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, if an administrator has enabled the experimental feature drag and drop upload of text/links in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Development &amp;gt; Experimental &amp;gt; [[Experimental settings]]&#039;&#039;, a link can be dragged into a section of the course and given a name, as shown in the images below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:dragURL.png|thumb|Adding a URL using drag and drop]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==URL module capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/url:view|View URL resource]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/url:addinstance|Add a new URL resource]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The URL module has additional settings which may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; URL&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Frame height===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can specify the height of the top frame (containing the navigation) if you choose the  &amp;quot;in frame&amp;quot; display option.  Note:If your theme has a large header then the height should be increased to prevent horizontal and vertical scrollbars.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require activity description===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows you to turn off the requirement for users to type something into the description box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Password===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can add a password that will connect your users to a secure site. [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=189842#p826416 See this forum post] for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Include role names in parameters===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Available display options===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows you to add different ways the resource may be displayed on the course page. There are a number of defaults but you can add or change them here. Other display options are:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;In frame&#039;&#039; - show the Moodle heading and the file description, with the file displayed in a resizeable area below &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;New window&#039;&#039; - very much like &#039;in pop-up&#039;, but the new window is a full browser window, with menus and address bar, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Display.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default values for activity settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can set the defaults for this resource. You can also choose which setting(s) to class as &amp;quot;Advanced&amp;quot;. These settings will only then appear if the user clicks &amp;quot;Show advanced&amp;quot; in the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/bJitv0UzeOY Moodle 2.0 Adding Content - URL]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Link/URL konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Paramètres de l&#039;URL]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Theme_settings&amp;diff=107895</id>
		<title>Theme settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Theme_settings&amp;diff=107895"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T02:26:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Themes}}&lt;br /&gt;
== Theme settings ==&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can change theme settings in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Themes &amp;gt; Theme settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Themesettings.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Theme list===&lt;br /&gt;
This lists the themes available for course and user themes. Leave this blank to allow any valid theme to be used. If you want to shorten the theme menu, you may specify a comma-separated list of names, though don&#039;t use spaces (e.g. standard,orangewhite).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can  preview the available themes in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Themes &amp;gt; Themes selector.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Theme designer mode===&lt;br /&gt;
Turn this on if you are designing and testing themes as it will stop the themes being cached and enable you to see theme changes quickly. (You can also do this with the Clear theme cache button on the theme selector page.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow user themes===&lt;br /&gt;
If the option &#039;&#039;allowuserthemes&#039;&#039; is enabled, each user may select their preferred theme on the edit profile page. All Moodle pages will be displayed in the user&#039;s theme, apart from courses where a course theme has been set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow course themes===&lt;br /&gt;
If you enable this, then teachers will be able to set their own course themes. Course themes override all other theme choices (site, user, or session themes).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If the option &#039;&#039;allowcoursethemes&#039;&#039; is enabled, each editing teacher may select their course theme via the Force theme option on the [[course/edit|Course settings]] page. The course will always be displayed in the theme specified in the course setting, with user and the site themes being overwritten.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow category themes===&lt;br /&gt;
When enabled, themes can be set at the category level. This will affect all child categories and courses unless they have specifically set their own theme. WARNING: Enabling category themes may affect performance, as it will result in a few extra DB queries on each page, so only turn this on if you need it!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow theme changes in the URL===&lt;br /&gt;
*If this is checked then the theme may be changed by adding &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;?theme=theme_name&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;theme=theme_name&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; if there are other URL parameters) to the URL in the browser. Theme names should be in lower case with spaces replaced by underscores, for example the theme &amp;quot;Formal white&amp;quot; should be entered as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;?theme=formal_white&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow users to hide blocks===&lt;br /&gt;
Allows users to display and hide blocks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow blocks to use the docks===&lt;br /&gt;
*If the theme allows it, then checking this will allow the user to move blocks to the side dock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Custom menu items===&lt;br /&gt;
The custommenuitems setting allows you to create a drop down menu that can be displayed by themes that support it. Currently all themes that are provided with Moodle 2.0 support this custom menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are able to create the custom menu by entering custom menu items one per line into the setting. Each item is preceded by a number of hyphens (-), the number of hyphens determines the depth of the item. So items that are &#039;&#039;&#039;NOT&#039;&#039;&#039; preceded by a hyphen appear on the top level of the menu (always visible), items with a single hyphen appear on a drop down menu below the previous top level item, and  items with two hyphens appear on a drop down menu below the previous first level item and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The content of each item is constructed of up to three bits, each separated by a &#039;&#039;&#039;|&#039;&#039;&#039; (Shift + \) character. The bits are &#039;&#039;&#039;label&#039;&#039;&#039; | &#039;&#039;&#039;url&#039;&#039;&#039; | &#039;&#039;&#039;tooltip&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
; label : This is the text that will be shown within the menu item. You must specify a label for every item on the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
; url : This is the URL that the user will be taken to it they click the menu item. This is optional, if not provided then the item will not link anywhere.&lt;br /&gt;
; tooltip : If you provide a URL you can also choose to provide a tooltip for the link that is created with the URL. This is optional and if not set the label is used as the tooltip for the menu item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following is an example of how you would create a custom menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle community|http://moodle.org&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle free support|http://moodle.org/support&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle development|http://moodle.org/development&lt;br /&gt;
--Moodle Tracker|http://tracker.moodle.org&lt;br /&gt;
--Moodle Docs|https://docs.moodle.org&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle News|http://moodle.org/news&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle company&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle commercial hosting|http://moodle.com/hosting&lt;br /&gt;
-Moodle commercial support|http://moodle.com/support&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: The custom menu does not escape characters within the label, if you want to use a special HTML character such as an ampersand you must escape it yourself within the label. e.g. use &amp;amp;amp; instead of &amp;amp;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on this setting please see the &#039;&#039;Using Moodle&#039;&#039; forum discussion [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=149803 Moodle 2.0: Custom menu in core]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Multilanguage support ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add a language code (or a comma separated list of codes) as the 4th item of the line. The line will be then printed if and only if the user has currently selected the listed language. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 English only|http://moodle.com|English only item|en&lt;br /&gt;
 German only|http://moodle.de|Deutsch|de,de_du,de_kids&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Adding other attributes to the HTML ====&lt;br /&gt;
Other attributes, such as &#039;&#039;&#039;target&#039;&#039;&#039; can be added with escaped quotes:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 Moodle Homepage|http://moodle.org\&amp;quot; target=\&amp;quot;_blank&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The first escaped quote closes the href attribute, allowing other attributes to be added. All quotes for the extra attributes must be escaped as well. Do not add the closing quotation mark on the final attribute, it is added automatically by Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enable device detection===&lt;br /&gt;
Will detect mobile and tablets that identify themselves via the web browser at the time of login to Moodle.   These work with the theme selector.  When the theme selector has identified a default, mobile and tablet themes, this feature will use that theme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Device detection regular expressions===&lt;br /&gt;
This will allow you to customize the theme selector options.   For example, you can add a custom theme for IE6 and another for Windows CE by entering the identifying expressions the browser sends and the &amp;quot;Return value&amp;quot; you want to display as the theme selectors &amp;quot;Device type&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Special themes==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Session themes ===&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle offers an additional way to set a theme - the &#039;&#039;&#039;session theme&#039;&#039;&#039;. This is set with the URL and lasts until you log out. When you next login, the site/course/user themes are active again. This option is great for theme testing and works perfectly when you want to enable different themes for different situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example you can offer a special link for PDA users and integrate the session theme &#039;&#039;orangewhitepda&#039;&#039; in that link. Nobody needs to change any settings, you just click on that link. The session theme is called by the URL parameter &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;amp;theme=orangewhitepda&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. The whole URL  without the session theme could look like &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://mymoodlesite.org/course/view.php?id=18&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and with the parameter for the PDA theme like &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;quot;http://mymoodlesite.org/course/view.php?id=18&amp;amp;theme=orangewhitepda&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a standard Moodle installation, session themes are not active. To activate them the administrator must add the parameter &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$CFG-&amp;gt;allowthemechangeonurl = true;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; to the Moodle &#039;&#039;config.php&#039;&#039; file in the Moodle base directory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Page theme ===&lt;br /&gt;
A page theme is for special page-only themes set by code, use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;$PAGE-&amp;gt;force_theme()&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Theme hierarchy ==&lt;br /&gt;
Here is the usual order that themes are considered by the Moodle interface.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;border:1px dashed #ddd&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;text-align:left&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!Theme type&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Overwrites&lt;br /&gt;
!Display&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Setting type&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Site&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;| - &lt;br /&gt;
|all pages*&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|saved in theme profile&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|User&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Site theme&lt;br /&gt;
|all pages*&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|saved in user profile&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Course&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Site, user and session themes&lt;br /&gt;
|one course&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|saved in course profile&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Session&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|Site and user themes&lt;br /&gt;
|all pages*&lt;br /&gt;
|style=&amp;quot;background:#eee&amp;quot;|temporary until logout&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
(* except courses with the course theme set)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Change default  hierarchy===&lt;br /&gt;
The priority of themes can be set via the /moodle/config.php file. The order defines which theme wins when there are several set at different levels. You can set a variable called $CFG-&amp;gt;themeorder (see config-dist.php for more details). By default it is set to: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;$CFG-&amp;gt;themeorder = array(&#039;course&#039;, &#039;category&#039;, &#039;session&#039;, &#039;user&#039;, &#039;site&#039;);&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Particular theme settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Logo, tagline, link colour, column width, custom CSS and other settings for a particular theme may be set by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Themes &amp;gt; Theme name&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/a4Sbg8k6PoU Moodle 2 Administrator Theme settings ]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuración de temas]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Réglages des thèmes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:テーマ設定]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Design-Einstellungen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Server_settings&amp;diff=107894</id>
		<title>Server settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Server_settings&amp;diff=107894"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T02:23:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Managing a Moodle site}}&lt;br /&gt;
*[[System paths]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Session handling]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[HTTP]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Maintenance mode]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cleanup]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Environment]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Site registration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/qVnR84C9NDU Moodle 2 Administration Server settings]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Servereinstellungen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones del servidor]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Self_enrolment&amp;diff=107893</id>
		<title>Self enrolment</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Self_enrolment&amp;diff=107893"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T02:19:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Enrolment}}&lt;br /&gt;
Self enrolment is the method whereby users can choose to enrol themselves into a course, either immediately by clicking &amp;quot;enrol me in this course&amp;quot; or by typing in an enrolment key they have been given. The enrolment plugin needs to be enabled by the site admin in [[Enrolment_plugins|enrolment plugins]] and has to be enabled within the course. The manual enrolment plugin has to be enabled in the same course as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Course settings for self enrolment==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Selfenrolment.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Checking self enrolment is enabled===&lt;br /&gt;
In a course, go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Enrolment methods&#039;&#039; and ensure the &amp;quot;eye&amp;quot; is opened for self enrolment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding an enrolment key to a course===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish only a certain group of users to self enrol (and not anyone) then you can set an enrolment key which you then tell them to use when they access the self-enrolment screen. See section 1 of [[Enrolment_key|enrolment key]] for how to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a group enrolment key to a course===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish your users to enrol themselves directly into a group in the course then you can set a group enrolment key which you then tell them to use when they access the self-enrolment screen. See section 2 of [[Enrolment_key|enrolment key]] for how to do this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also this screencast [http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4xzF7xerle0 Group enrolment keys in Moodle 2.0].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following settings may be changed by clicking the edit (hand/pen) icon to the right of the self-enrolment option in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Enrolment methods&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting the enrolment period===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the &amp;quot;enable&amp;quot; box to the right of Enrolment period and then choose your dates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enrolment duration===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set the amount of time a user enrolment is valid, starting with the moment the user enrols themselves. If disabled, the enrolment duration will be unlimited.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Notifying users when their enrolment expires===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible also for students and/or teachers to be notified when enrolments expire by selecting either &amp;quot;Enroller only&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Enroller and enrolled user&amp;quot; from the dropdown &amp;quot;Notify before enrolment expires&amp;quot; and a time in &amp;quot;Notification threshold&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:selfenrolmenexpirynotification.png|thumb|Settings for notifiying users before enrolment expires. Click to enlarge.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Editing individual enrolment times====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to edit the date and hour of an individual&#039;s enrolment from &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Course administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Enrolled users&#039;&#039; by clicking the edit icon in the enrolment methods column for the user in question. This then brings up a screen where the date and time can be modified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:selfenrolment241.png|thumb|Click the edit icon in the enrolment methods column for the user]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:selfenrolment242.png|thumb|Modifying the date and time]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Unenrolling students who haven&#039;t been active on the course===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose from the dropdown to the right of &amp;quot;Unenrol inactive after...&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Deciding the maximum number of users in your course===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Type the maximum number of users you want in your course in &amp;quot;Max enrolled users&amp;quot;. When this limit is reached, nobody will be able to self-enrol. If you leave the number at 0 then there will be no maximum number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allowing only cohort members to self-enrol===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have cohorts set up, then you can restrict self enrolment to particular cohorts by selecting the name of the cohort from the drop down box, A member of the cohort can self-enrol as normal; whereas a non-member gets a message telling them they are not able to self-enrol.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:cohortselfenrol.png|thumb|Restricting self enrolment to members of a particular cohort]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:noncohortmember.png|thumb|Message seen by a user not in a cohort who is attempting to self-enrol]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sending a welcome message to new users===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If enabled, users receive the following message via email when they self-enrol in a course:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Welcome to {Course name}&lt;br /&gt;
 If you have not done so already, you should edit your profile page so that we can learn more about you: {link to profile page}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to send a different message, simply type it in the custom welcome message text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: An admin can customise the message for the whole site by editing the &#039;&#039;welcometocoursetext&#039;&#039; language string. See [[Language customization]] for further details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Admin settings==&lt;br /&gt;
The self enrolment plugin may be enabled or disabled throughout the site in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Enrolments &amp;gt; Manage enrol plugins.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Shared settings for all courses===&lt;br /&gt;
The page &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Enrolments &amp;gt; Self enrolment.&#039;&#039; contains options for defaults that admin can set:&lt;br /&gt;
* Require an enrolment key - if this box is ticked then all courses with self-enrolment enabled will need to have an enrolment key. The setting won&#039;t save until the teacher adds a key - something to be aware of as this can cause confusion:)&lt;br /&gt;
* Use password policy - tick this box if you want enrolment keys set by teachers to follow the password policy of the site.&lt;br /&gt;
* Show hint - tick this box if you are prepared to allow the first letter of a key to be given as a &amp;quot;hint&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enrolment expiration action - specifies what happens when user enrolments reach expiration date. Please note that option &amp;quot;Unenrol user from course&amp;quot; purges grades, group memberships, preferences and other user related data from the courses.&lt;br /&gt;
* Hour to send enrolment expiry notifications - specify hour for sending expiration notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default enrolment settings in new courses===&lt;br /&gt;
These can be set in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Enrolments &amp;gt; Self enrolment&#039;&#039; but teachers in individual courses can alter them to suit their needs:&lt;br /&gt;
* Add instance to new courses - if admin selects this, then any new course created will include the self enrolment plugin&lt;br /&gt;
* Enable self enrolments- if this is enabled then users by default can self enrol into a course.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use group enrolment keys - the setting for group enrolment keys in a course will be set to &amp;quot;yes&amp;quot; by default&lt;br /&gt;
* Default role assignment - normally, when users self enrol, they have the student role. If necessary that role can be changed by default here - for example - if your Moodle has a dedicated role you wish to use instead.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enrolment duration - this sets the default enrolment length for new courses (but again, may be altered by the course teacher.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Notify before enrolment expires - specifies if teacher or optionally students should be notified before the expiration.&lt;br /&gt;
* Notification threshold - specify how many days should be users notified before the enrolment expiration.&lt;br /&gt;
* Unenrol inactive after- this sets the default time after which a student will be unenrolled if they haven&#039;t accessed the courses. (Teachers may change this)&lt;br /&gt;
* Max enrolled users - adding a number here will specify the maximum number of users who can self-enrol into new courses. Teachers in the course can change this. If it is left at 0, there will be no maximum.&lt;br /&gt;
* Send course welcome message- if this box is checked then newly enrolled users will receive a welcome message by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Self enrolment method options==&lt;br /&gt;
One course may contain multiple self enrolment methods. User may be enrolled once in each instance only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Custom instance name - specify custom enrolment method name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enable existing enrolments - if disabled all users enrolled via this plugin can not access course.&lt;br /&gt;
* Allow new enrolments - disable if you do not want to allow students to self enrol in the future.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enrolment key - specify key required for enrolment.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use group enrolment keys - optionally use group keys for enrolment too.&lt;br /&gt;
* Default assigned role - specify role to be assigned to suers during enrolment, this can be manually after user enrolment.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enrolment duration - specify enrolment length, this can be manually after user enrolment.&lt;br /&gt;
* Notify before enrolment expires - specifies if teacher or optionally students should be notified before the expiration.&lt;br /&gt;
* Notification threshold - specify how many days should be users notified before the enrolment expiration.&lt;br /&gt;
* Unenrol inactive after- specify time after which a student will be unenrolled if they haven&#039;t accessed the courses.&lt;br /&gt;
* Max enrolled users - adding a number here will specify the maximum number of users who can self-enrol into this course.&lt;br /&gt;
* Only cohort members - optionally restrict this enrolment method to members of specified cohort.&lt;br /&gt;
* Send course welcome message- if this box is checked then newly enrolled users will receive a welcome message by default.&lt;br /&gt;
* Custom welcome message - specify custom message if necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Self enrolment capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/enrol/self:config|Configure self enrol instances]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/enrol/self:manage|Manage enrolled users]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/enrol/self:unenrol|Unenrol users from course]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/enrol/self:unenrolself|Unenrol self from the course]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/jl52muw67bg Enabling Self Enrolment in Moodle 2.x]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Selbsteinschreibung]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=HTTP_security&amp;diff=107892</id>
		<title>HTTP security</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=HTTP_security&amp;diff=107892"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T02:16:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Security}}&lt;br /&gt;
HTTPS for logins can be enabled by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Security &amp;gt; HTTP security&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Use HTTPS for logins==&lt;br /&gt;
HTTPS encrypts the user&#039;s login data, so it&#039;s difficult to sniff out a user&#039;s username and password on the network. You will need to enable HTTPS on your server before you turn on this setting, or else you will be locked out of your site. Every web server has a different method for enabling HTTPS, so you should check the documentation for your web server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/VZdv2FvxwrQ Moodle 2 Administration Security settings] MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=79110 Locked out] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:HTTP-Sicherheit]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=IP_blocker&amp;diff=107891</id>
		<title>IP blocker</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=IP_blocker&amp;diff=107891"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T02:15:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Security}}&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can set a list of allowed and/or blocked IP addresses in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Security &amp;gt; IP blocker&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IPblocker.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*By default, entries in the blocked list are processed first, but checking the box &#039;&#039;Allowed list will be processed first&#039;&#039; reverses this order.&lt;br /&gt;
*Each entry in the allowed or blocked list goes on one line, with either the full IP address, partial address or range.  Blank lines or domain names written as text (like moodle.org) are ignored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Be aware that with any entries in the Allowed IP List, the effect is to allow ONLY those IP addresses and block all others. Exercise care with this setting, as it is possible to lock yourself out of Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there are entries present in the Blocked IP List, any hosts for which Moodle cannot determine the IP address will be blocked by default. For example, hosts that are behind a web proxy server which does not pass the HTTP headers containing the remote IP address information. In this case Moodle cannot determine the host&#039;s IP address with which to compare against the Blocked IP List, so the host is blocked by default. A suggested workaround may be to change the Logged IP address source (getremoteaddrconf setting within Site administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; HTTP &amp;gt; Reverse Proxy) from the default to &amp;quot;REMOTE_ADDR&amp;quot; which will log the IP address of the proxy server instead of the host behind it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/VZdv2FvxwrQ Moodle 2 Administration Security settings] MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Blocage IP]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:IP-Blockierung]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Anti-virus&amp;diff=107890</id>
		<title>Anti-virus</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Anti-virus&amp;diff=107890"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T02:14:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Security}}&lt;br /&gt;
The use of the open source virus scanner clam AV on uploaded files can be enabled by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Security &amp;gt; Anti-Virus&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clam AV should be installed on your server. See http://www.clamav.net for more information and also [[Talk:Anti-virus]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/VZdv2FvxwrQ Moodle 2 Administration Security settings] MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=147820 ClamAV upgrade may be required] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
*ClamAV reporting errors when scanning external repo files MDL-34939&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Antibirusa]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[hu:Vírusölő]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Antivirus]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Site_policies&amp;diff=107889</id>
		<title>Site policies</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Site_policies&amp;diff=107889"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T02:11:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Security}}&lt;br /&gt;
A site administrator can set site policies affecting the security and privacy of the site in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Security &amp;gt; Site policies&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Protect usernames===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If enabled, when a user attempts to reset their password and enters a username or email address, the following message is displayed: &amp;quot;If you supplied a correct username or email address then an email should have been sent to you.&amp;quot; This is to prevent a malicious party from using the interface to determine which usernames and email addresses are in use in valid accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the protect usernames setting is disabled, when a user attempts to reset their password they are provided with feedback regarding whether an account exists with the username or email address supplied. For example, the message &amp;quot;The email address was not found in the database&amp;quot; may be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Force users to login===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you turn this setting on, all users must login before they even see the [[Front Page]] of the site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Force users to login for profiles===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this set to Yes to keep anonymous visitors away from user profiles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Force users to login to view user pictures===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If enabled, users must login in order to view user profile pictures and the default user picture will be used in all notification emails.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Open to Google===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling this setting allows Google&#039;s search spiders guest access to your site. Any part of the site that allows guest access will then be searchable on Google. In addition, people coming in to your site via a Google search will automatically be logged in as a guest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Profile visible roles===&lt;br /&gt;
Any role which is checked/ticked here will be visible on  user profiles and the Participation screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum uploaded file size===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Probably the most frequently asked question in the Moodle.org Using Moodle forums is &amp;quot;How do I increase the upload file size limit?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Upload file sizes are restricted in a number of ways - each one in this list restricts the following ones:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The Apache server setting LimitRequestBody ... default in Apache 2.x or greater is set to 0 or an unlimited upload size&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. The PHP site settings post_max_size and upload_max_filesize in php.ini : &#039;&#039;&#039;modify php.ini in web server directories&#039;&#039;&#039; ( apache2.x.x/bin/php.ini ) not in php directories :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 post_max_size = 128M;  to increase limit to 128 Megabytes;&lt;br /&gt;
 upload_max_filesize = 128M;  to increase limit to 128 Megabytes;&lt;br /&gt;
 max_execution_time = 600 ; Maximum execution time of each script, in seconds;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The Moodle site-wide maximum uploaded file size setting: &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Security &amp;gt; Site policies &amp;gt; Maximum uploaded file size&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. The Moodle course maximum uploaded file size setting in the course default  settings: &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Courses &amp;gt; Course default settings&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. The  file size settings in each individual course in &#039;&#039;Course Administration&amp;gt;Settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Certain course activity module settings (for example, Assignment)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* See [[File upload size]] for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===User quota===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The maximum number of bytes that a user can store in their own [[Private files]] area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow EMBED and OBJECT tags===&lt;br /&gt;
Allowing these presents a security risk but if you wish normal users such as students to be able to use them then check the box here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enable trusted content===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default Moodle will always thoroughly clean text that comes from users to remove any possible bad scripts, media etc that could be a security risk. The Trusted Content system is a way of giving particular users that you trust the ability to include these advanced features in their content without interference. To enable this system, you need to first enable this setting, and then grant the [[Capabilities/moodle/site:trustcontent|Trust submitted content]] capability to a specific Moodle role. Texts created or uploaded by such users will be marked as trusted and will not be cleaned before display. Please refer to [[dev:Trusttext cleaning bypass]] for further information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum time to edit posts===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the editing time for forum postings. The editing time is the amount of time users have to change forum postings before they are mailed to subscribers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please refer to the forum discussions [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=28679 Editing a forum post after the 30 minutes deadline] and [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=5367 The philosophy underlying &amp;quot;no editing after 30 minutes&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Full name format===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If set to &#039;First name&#039; only users with the [[Capabilities/moodle/site:viewfullnames|view full names capability]] (by default managers, teachers and non-editing teachers) can view users&#039; full names.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow extended characters in usernames===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default here, unchecked = unenabled, can only contain alphabetical letters in lowercase, numbers, hypen &#039;-&#039;, underscore &#039;_&#039;, period &#039;.&#039;, or at sign &#039;@&#039;. If you enable this, it will be possible to have any characters for the username.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Site policy URL===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you have a site policy that all users must see and agree to before using this site, then specify the URL to it here, otherwise leave this field blank. The URL can point to any type of file anywhere online that can be accessed without a log in to your Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
* It is recommended that the site policy is on the same domain as Moodle to avoid the problem of Internet Explorer users seeing a blank screen when the site policy is on a different domain.&lt;br /&gt;
* The site policy will be displayed in a frame. You can view it via the URL &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;yourmoodlesite.org/user/policy.php&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Site policy URL for guests===&lt;br /&gt;
This is similar to the Site policy URL as above but will be seen by those to whom you give guest access.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Keep tag name casing===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If checked, then tags like the following will be displayed: SOCCER, gUiTaR, MacDonalds, music&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If unchecked, then all tags will be displayed as follows: Soccer, Guitar, Macdonalds, Music&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tips&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
:* For English, off is useful.&lt;br /&gt;
:* For Japanese, no changes are made either way.&lt;br /&gt;
:* For languages where this kind of capitalization changes the meaning, it is best to keep this option on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Profiles for enrolled users only===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To prevent misuse by spammers, profile descriptions of users who are not yet enrolled in any course are hidden. New users must enrol in at least one course before they can add a profile description.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Cron execution via command line only===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Cron]] is an action that runs various administrative jobs on your Moodle such as sending out forum posts. Normally Cron can be run by typing www.YOURMOODLE.com/admin/cron.php but as anyone logged in can do this, if you wish to prevent it, then check this box and only a admin can run Cron from the command line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Cron password for remote access===&lt;br /&gt;
Setting a password here will mean that users can only run cron from the browser if they know the password and add it like this:&lt;br /&gt;
www.YOURMOODLE.com/admin/cron.php/?password=THEPASSWORDYOUSET&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Account lockout===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}In Moodle 2.5 onwards, account lockout may enabled. After a specified number of failed login attempts, a user&#039;s account is locked and they are sent an email containing a URL to unlock the account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The account may also be unlocked by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Accounts &amp;gt; Browse list of users&#039;&#039; or by waiting for the account lockout duration to elapse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Password policy===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is highly recommended that a password policy is set to force users to use stronger passwords that are less susceptible to being cracked by a intruder.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Password policy.png|thumb|Password policy]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password policy includes option to set the minimum length of the password, the minimum number of digits, the minimum number of lower-case characters, the minimum number of upper-case characters and the minimum number of non alphanumeric characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The password policy is enabled by default. Default (recommended) settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
* Password length - 8&lt;br /&gt;
* Digits - 1&lt;br /&gt;
* Lowercase letters - 1&lt;br /&gt;
* Uppercase letters - 1&lt;br /&gt;
* Non-alphanumeric characters - 1&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a user enters a password that does not meet the requirements, they are given an error message indicating the nature of the problem with the entered password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling the password policy does not affect existing users until they decide to or are required to change their password. An admin can force all users to change their password using the force password change option in [[Bulk user actions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip&#039;&#039;: The password policy may also be applied to [[Enrolment key|enrolment keys]] by ticking the &#039;Use password policy&#039; checkbox in the [[Self enrolment]] settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Group enrolment key policy===&lt;br /&gt;
If this is enabled then when a teacher sets a group enrolment key, they will have to set a key which follows the password policy set above. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Disable user profile images===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check/tick this box if you don&#039;t want your users to be able to change their [[User pictures|profile images]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email change confirmation===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A confirmation step is required for users to change their email address unless the &#039;&#039;emailchangeconfirmation&#039;&#039; box is unchecked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Remember username===&lt;br /&gt;
If you want  usernames to be stored during login then set this to &amp;quot;yes&amp;quot;. This will store permanent cookies and in some countries may be considered a privacy issue if used without consent. From a UK point of view, see http://tracker.moodle.org/secure/attachment/24290/UK+Laws+Relating+to+Cookies-LUNS2011.pdf See also the Using Moodle forum discussion [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=201558 EU Cookie Law].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/VZdv2FvxwrQ Moodle 2 Administration Security settings] MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Políticas del sitio]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Gunearen_politikak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Règles site]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:サイトポリシー]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Website-Rechte]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Using_RSS_feeds&amp;diff=107888</id>
		<title>Using RSS feeds</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Using_RSS_feeds&amp;diff=107888"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T02:06:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{RSS feeds}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Activities and other areas that produce RSS feeds==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Blogs]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Database]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Forum]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Glossary]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Subscribing to RSS feeds==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To subscribe to an RSS feed from Moodle, go to the activity, click on the orange &#039;RSS&#039; button and copy the address from your browser bar to your RSS reader software.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restricting access to RSS feeds==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To ensure security and privacy, RSS feed URLs contain a special token that identifies the user they are for. This prevents users from accessing areas of Moodle they shouldn&#039;t have access to via RSS feeds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users have this token automatically created for them the first time they access an area of Moodle that produces an RSS feed. If a user feels that their RSS feed token has been compromised in some way they can request a new one by going to &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; My profile &amp;gt; Security keys&#039;&#039; and clicking the Reset link next to the RSS key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To provide a public RSS feed for use on another site, login to your Moodle site as a guest, then copy the RSS feed address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/Zx9o-ueJ-II Moodle 2.0 - RSS]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:RSS-Feeds nutzen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Site-wide_reports&amp;diff=107887</id>
		<title>Site-wide reports</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Site-wide_reports&amp;diff=107887"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T02:03:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Managing a Moodle site}}&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to reports available at both site and course level, the following site-wide reports are available for administrators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Config changes report]] - Shows changes made by an administrator to the site configuration&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Course overview report]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Question instances report]] - Reports where particular question types are used on the site&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/YJ5qxYfWmbY Moodle 2 Administration Reports]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Logs]] - Activity reports for course or site&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Reports FAQ]] &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Course reports]] in Managing a Moodle course&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Plugins_overview| Plugins overview]] for checking the status of all plugins on the site.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[:dev:General report plugins|General report plugins]] developer documentation&lt;br /&gt;
*[[ad-hoc contributed reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Report]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Reportes del sitio]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Quiz_settings&amp;diff=107886</id>
		<title>Quiz settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Quiz_settings&amp;diff=107886"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T01:55:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Quiz}}&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a new quiz is a two-step process. In the first step, you create the quiz activity and set its options which specify the rules for interacting with the quiz. In the second step you add questions to the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
This page describes the options you can set for the quiz activity. The page [[Building Quiz]] describes how to set up the questions for the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quiz administration==&lt;br /&gt;
When you first set up your quiz from &#039;&#039;Add an activity or resource &amp;gt; Quiz&#039;&#039;, (or, if you don&#039;t have this link, the dropdown &#039;&#039;Add an activity&amp;gt;Quiz&#039;&#039;) you will get the following settings, (which can also be changed later in the Edit Settings link of the Quiz administration settings block) All settings may expanded by clicking the &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; link top right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quizgeneral25.png|thumb|General settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
;Name&lt;br /&gt;
:This is the standard name field. This name will appear on the home page of the course, navigation menu and other places which will show or provide links to this quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Description&lt;br /&gt;
:Describe the purpose of the glossary and provide instructions or background information, links etc. Click &amp;quot;Show editing tools&amp;quot; to display the rich text editor, and drag the bottom right of the text box out to expand it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;&#039;&#039;&#039;Display description on course page&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
:If ticked, the quiz description will appear on the course page directly under the quiz name.&lt;br /&gt;
==Timing==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quiztiming25.png|thumb|Timing settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Open the quiz&lt;br /&gt;
:You can specify times when the quiz is accessible for people to make attempts. Before the opening time the quiz will be unavailable to students. They will be able to view the quiz introduction but will not be able to view the questions. Quizzes with start times in the future diasplay both the open and close date for students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: You can make the quiz available at different times for different groups or users in the Group or User override sections of the Quiz Administration settings block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Close the quiz&lt;br /&gt;
:After the closing time, the students will not be able to start new attempts. Answers that the student submits after the quiz closing date will be saved but they will not be marked. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: Even after the quiz has closed students will still be able to see the quiz description and review their attempts. What exactly they will see depends on the settings you choose for review options (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
;Time limit&lt;br /&gt;
:By default, quizzes do not have a time limit, which allows students as much time as they need to complete the quiz. If you do specify a time limit, several things are done to try and ensure that quizzes are completed within that time:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quiz timer.png|thumb|Navigation block showing quiz timer]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# A countdown timer is shown in the quiz navigation block &lt;br /&gt;
# When the timer has run out, the quiz is submitted automatically with whatever answers have been filled in so far &lt;br /&gt;
# If a student manages to cheat and goes over the allotted time, no marks are awarded for any answers entered after the time ran out&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: You can make the quiz available last a different period of time for different groups or users in the Group or User override sections of the Quiz Administration settings block (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;When time expires..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three options as to what will happen when the time limit is up. Choose the one you need from the dropdown menu:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quiztiming25.png|thumb|right|Timing options]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;there is a grace period...&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; then you can check the box to enable the &amp;quot;Submission grace period&amp;quot; and specify a period of time during which learners may still submit the quiz after the time is up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Examples of how timing is handled===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#A student starts a quiz at noon. The quiz has a one-hour time-limit, and a 1 hour delay between attempts. The student gets distracted, and so actually does not submit (using the overdue handling) until 1:30pm. &#039;&#039;They are allowed to start their second attempt at 2. pm&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#The quiz count-down timer submits a student&#039;s quiz attempt at the last second when time expires. Because the server is heavily loaded, it takes 30 seconds to process the student&#039;s attempt. &#039;&#039;The submission is accepted nonetheless.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Same situation as above but with a 120 second delay: &#039;&#039;The submission is rejected.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#The delay is not because of server load but because the student found a way to cheat the timer. &#039;&#039;Moodle cannot know what causes a delay.The behaviour is controlled by the admin setting(quiz | graceperiodmin), 60 seconds by default.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#A student is a member of 3 groups,all of which have different override settings. Which limits will apply to this student? &#039;&#039;If there is any user-specific override, then that is used, and the group overrides for that setting are not used at all. Otherwise, if there are multiple group overrides, the most generous values are used (the earliest open date, the latest close date, the longest time limit, the most number of attempts, and the student can type any of the passwords).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grade==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quizgrade25.png|thumb|Grade settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Grade category&lt;br /&gt;
If you have categories in your gradebook, select the one you wish the quiz to be in here.&lt;br /&gt;
;Attempts allowed&lt;br /&gt;
:Students may be allowed to have multiple attempts at a quiz. This can help make the process of taking the quiz more of an educational activity rather than simply an assessment. If the quiz is randomized then the student will get a new version for each attempt. This is useful for practice purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: You can change the allowed number of attempts for different groups or users in the Group or User override sections of the Quiz Administration settings block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Grading method&lt;br /&gt;
:When multiple attempts are allowed, there are different ways you can use the grades to calculate the student&#039;s final grade for the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
* Highest grade - the final grade is the highest (best) grade in any attempt&lt;br /&gt;
* Average grade - the final grade is the average (simple mean) grade of all attempts&lt;br /&gt;
* First grade - the final grade is the grade earned on the first attempt (other attempts are ignored)&lt;br /&gt;
* Last grade - the final grade is the grade earned on the most recent attempt only&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Layout==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quizlayout25.png|thumb|Layout settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Question order&lt;br /&gt;
:If &#039;Shuffled randomly&#039; is selected, then the order of questions in the quiz will be randomly shuffled each time a student starts a new attempt at the quiz. The intention is to make it a little harder for students to copy from each other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;New page&lt;br /&gt;
:For longer quizzes it makes sense to stretch the quiz over several pages by limiting the number of questions per page. When adding questions to the quiz, page breaks will automatically be inserted according to the setting you choose here. However, you will also be able to move page breaks around by hand later on the editing page.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Note that changing this setting has no effect on questions you have already added to the quiz&#039;&#039;&#039;. The setting will only apply to questions you add subsequently. To change the page breaks in an existing quiz, you need to go to the quiz editing screen, tick the &#039;Show page breaks&#039; checkbox, then use the repaginate control.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Navigation method (available by clicking &#039;&#039;Show More&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By choosing &#039;&#039;Sequential&#039;&#039; instead of &#039;&#039;Free&#039;&#039;, the teacher is forcing the student to progress through the questions in order without being able to go back to a previous question or skip to a later one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Question behaviour==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quizbehaviour25.png|thumb|Question behaviour settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
;Shuffle within questions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If set to &#039;yes&#039;, then each time the student takes a quiz the parts of the question will be shuffled randomly.&lt;br /&gt;
;How questions behave&lt;br /&gt;
* Deferred feedback - Students must enter an answer to each question and then submit the entire quiz, before anything is graded or they get any feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
* Adaptive mode and Adaptive mode (no penalties) - Allows students to have multiple attempts at the question before moving on to the next question. &lt;br /&gt;
*Interactive mode - After submitting one answer, and reading the feedback, the student has to click a &#039;Try again&#039; button before they can try a new response. Once the student has got the question right, they can no longer change their response. Once the student has got the question wrong too many times, they are just graded wrong (or partially correct) and get shown the feedback and can no longer change their answer. There can be different feedback after each try the student makes. &lt;br /&gt;
*Immediate feedback - Similar to interactive mode in that the student can submit their response immediately during the quiz attempt, and get it graded. However, they can only submit one response, they cannot change it later. &lt;br /&gt;
*Deferred feedback or Immediate feedback with &#039;&#039;&#039;Certainty-based marking&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;CBM&#039;&#039;&#039;) - With CBM, the student does not only answer the question, but they also indicate how sure they are they got the question right. The grading is adjusted by the choice of certainty, so that students have to reflect honestly on their own level of knowledge in order to get the best mark.  See the &#039;&#039;See Also&#039;&#039; section below for an example quiz using CBM and a blog post explaining the philosophy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039; There is also an option &amp;quot;Manual grading&amp;quot; which can be enabled from A&#039;&#039;dministration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Question behaviour&#039;&#039; This causes all questions in the quiz to require manual grading.&lt;br /&gt;
===Certainty-based marking===&lt;br /&gt;
When a student answers a question they also have to state how sure they are of the answer: not very (less than 67%); fairly (more than 67%) or very (more than 80%). Their grading is then adjusted according to how certain they are, which means that for example if they answered correctly but were only guessing, their mark is adjusted from 1 to 0.33. If they answered wrongly but were very sure, their mark is adjusted from 0 to -2. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:cbm03.png|thumb|correct answer; very sure]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:cbm05.png|thumb|correct answer; fairly sure]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:cmb04.png|thumb|correct answer; not very sure]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:cbm01.png|thumb|wrong answer; very sure]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:cbm99.png|thumb|wrong answer; not very sure]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Each attempt builds on the last (available by clicking &amp;quot;Show more&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
:If multiple attempts are allowed and this setting is set to Yes, then each new attempt contains the results of the previous attempt. This allows the student on the new attempt to concentrate on just those questions that were answered incorrectly on the previous attempt. If this option is chosen then each attempt by a particular student uses the same questions in the same order, independent of randomization settings. To show a fresh quiz on every attempt, select No for this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039; to find out more about an available patch extending and enhancing CBM feedback, see [[Using certainty-based marking]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Review options==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quizreviewoptions25.png|thumb|Review options expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section controls what information students will be shown when they review their past attempts at the quiz, and during the attempt in adaptive mode.  It is a matrix with check boxes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The various pieces of information that can be controlled are:&lt;br /&gt;
; The attempt: Will show how the student responded to each question.&lt;br /&gt;
; Whether correct: Displays whether the students response to each question is correct or incorrect.&lt;br /&gt;
; Marks:  Reveals the marks awarded to the student and the grade for the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
; Specific feedback: Will show the feedback for the response to the answer as set when adding the question to the quiz. Each response to a question can have feedback for both correct and incorrect answers.&lt;br /&gt;
; General feedback: Displays the general feedback for the whole question as set when adding the question to the quiz. You can use the general feedback to give students some background to what knowledge the question was testing. &lt;br /&gt;
; Right answer:  Reveals the correct answer to each question, whether the student answered correctly or not (See note below).&lt;br /&gt;
; Overall feedback: Displays feedback for the entire quiz as set in the quiz settings (See note below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each of the above items, you can determine the timeframe when the students will see them:&lt;br /&gt;
; During the attempt : is only available when &#039;&#039;‘How questions behave’&#039;&#039; has been set to &#039;&#039;‘Immediate feedback’&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;‘Immediate feedback with CBM’&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;‘Interactive with multiple tries’&#039;&#039;. If set to one of these options then a &#039;&#039;‘Check’&#039;&#039; button will appear below the answer and when clicked the student will submit that response and then receive immediate feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
; Immediately after the attempt : means within 2 minutes of the student clicking &amp;quot;submit all and finish&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
; Later, while the quiz is still open : means after 2 minutes, but before the close date (if the quiz does not have a close date, this phase never ends).&lt;br /&gt;
; After the quiz is closed : means what it says (you never get here for quizzes without a close date).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; Checking any of the boxes in the timeframe row, will reveal the test to the student. For example, to allow students to see their quiz immediately after taking it but not later, make sure none of the boxes in &amp;quot;Later&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;After&amp;quot; rows are checked.  The student will be able to see their grade but not get into the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Currently, the Answers display is a bit inconsistent between different question types. For example, the matching question type shows students which of their responses are correct, but does not tell them the right answer for the ones they got wrong. The short answer and multiple choices question types do tell the student what the correct answer is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the capability &#039;View hidden grades&#039; [[Capabilities/moodle/grade:viewhidden|moodle/grade:viewhidden]] (typically teachers and administrators) are not affected by these settings and will always by able to review all information about a student&#039;s attempt at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In your list of review options, you must have &#039;The attempt&#039; (the first option in the lists) selected  before you can enable the options to show &#039;Whether correct&#039;, &#039;Specific feedback&#039;, &#039;General feedback&#039;, and &#039;Right answer&#039;. If you choose not to let the students review the attempt, your only options are to display &#039;Marks&#039; and &#039;Overall feedback&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Display==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quizdisplay25.png|thumb|Display settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Decimal places in grades&lt;br /&gt;
:This option determines how many digits will be shown after the decimal point when the grade is displayed. A setting of 0 for example means that the grades are displayed as integers. This setting is only used for the display of grades, not for the display or marking of answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Extra restrictions on attempts==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default nd are available by clicking &amp;quot;Show more&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quizextrarestrictionsonattempts25.png|thumb|Extra restrictions settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Require password&lt;br /&gt;
:This field is optional. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:If you specify a password in here then participants must enter the same password before they are allowed to make an attempt on the quiz. This is useful to give only a selected group of students access to the quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Require network address&lt;br /&gt;
:This field is optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:You can restrict access for a quiz to particular subnets on the LAN or Internet by specifying a comma-separated list of partial or full IP address numbers. This is especially useful for a proctored (invigilated) quiz, where you want to be sure that only people in a certain room are able to access the quiz. For example: 192.168. , 231.54.211.0/20, 231.3.56.211&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:There are three types of numbers you can use (you can not use text based domain names like example.com): &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Full IP addresses, such as 192.168.10.1 which will match a single computer (or proxy). &lt;br /&gt;
# Partial addresses, such as 192.168 which will match anything starting with those numbers. &lt;br /&gt;
# CIDR notation, such as 231.54.211.0/20 which allows you to specify more detailed subnets. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Spaces are ignored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Enforced delay between attempts&lt;br /&gt;
:These two  fields are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:You can set a time (from seconds to weeks) between the first and second attempt of a quiz. You can also (or alternatively) set a time from seconds to weeks for subsequent attempts after the second attempt. Thus, you might allow a student to take the quiz twice immediately with no delay, but if they want to improve their score with a third attempt, they are forced to wait a week and use the time for extra revision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Browser security&lt;br /&gt;
:This is by default an advanced field, visible by clicking &amp;quot;Show advanced&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
:The options in this section offer various ways to try to restrict how students may try to &#039;cheat&#039; while attempting a quiz. However, this is not a simple issue, and what in one situation is considered &#039;cheating&#039; may, in another situation, just be effective use of information technology. (For example, the ability to quickly find answers using a search engine.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::Note also that this is not just at problem of technology with a technical solution. Cheating has been going on since long before computers, and while computers make certain actions, like copy and paste, easier, they also make it easier for teachers to detect cheating - for example using the quiz reports. The options provided here are not fool-proof, and while they do make some forms of cheating harder for students, they also make it more inconvenient for students to attempt the quizzes, and they are not fool-proof.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Full screen pop-up with some JavaScript security&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:There is a limit to what the quiz, which runs on a web server, can do to restrict what the student sitting at their computer can do while attempting the quiz. However, this option does what is possible:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:* The quiz will only start if the student has a JavaScript-enabled web-browser.&lt;br /&gt;
:* The quiz appears in a fullscreen popup window that covers all the other windows and has no  course navigation controls.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:seb24.png|thumb|Student view of quiz question with full screen popup. (Click to see enlarged)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
:* The students are prevented, as far as is possible, from using facilities like copy and paste.&lt;br /&gt;
:* This setting does not work well with the MyMobile theme for mobile devices included in the standard installation.  In particular, quiz time limits do not function correctly (MDL-32047).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Require the use of Safe Exam Browser&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:This option will only appear if your administrator has enabled it in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Development &amp;gt; Experimental &amp;gt; Experimental settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:[[Safe exam browser|Safe Exam Browser]] is a customised web browser that must be downloaded and installed on the computer that the student uses to attempt the quiz. It restricts student use more effectively than a pop up window option.  Features include full screen, without web navigation options, shortcut keys including copy and paste are disabled and of course surfing the web during an exam.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Overall feedback==&lt;br /&gt;
(These setttings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:quizoverallfeedback25.png|thumb|Overall feedback settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Overall feedback is shown to a student after they have completed an attempt at the quiz. The text that is shown can depend on the grade the student got. Click &amp;quot;Show editing tools&amp;quot; to display the rich text editor, and drag the bottom right of the text box out to expand it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you entered:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Grade boundary: 100%&lt;br /&gt;
:Feedback: &amp;quot;Well done&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:Grade boundary: 40%&lt;br /&gt;
:Feedback: &amp;quot;Please study this week&#039;s work again&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
:Grade boundary: 0%&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then students who score between 100% and 40% will see the &amp;quot;Well done&amp;quot; message, and those who score between 39.99% and 0% will see &amp;quot;Please study this week&#039;s work again&amp;quot;. That is, the grade boundaries define ranges of grades, and each feedback string is displayed to scores within the appropriate range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Grade boundaries can be specified either as a percentage, for example &amp;quot;31.41%&amp;quot;, or as a number, for example &amp;quot;7&amp;quot;. If your quiz is out of 10 marks, a grade boundary of 7 means 7/10 or better. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the maximum and minimum grade boundaries (100% and 0%) are set automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set as many or as few grade boundaries as you wish. The form allows you up to 5 ranges at first, but you can add more by clicking the &amp;quot;Add 3 fields to form&amp;quot; button underneath.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you&#039;re getting confusing error messages about a boundary being out of sequence (when it&#039;s obviously *in* sequence), or &amp;quot;boundaries must be between 0% and 100%&amp;quot; (and they are) -- check that the Maximum Grade for this quiz is set to something greater than zero.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access/Activity completion==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrict access and Activity completion settings are visible if [[Conditional activities]] and [[Activity completion]] have been enabled in the site and the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Group and User overrides==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:overridesquiz.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dates, timing and number of allowed attempts may be changed for individual users or groups by following the links &#039;&#039;Group Overrides&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;User Overrides&#039;&#039; in the Quiz Administration settings block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Group overrides===&lt;br /&gt;
To change a quiz setting for a particular group, click the &amp;quot;add group override&amp;quot; button in &#039;&#039;Quiz Administration&amp;gt;Group overrides&#039;&#039;, make the changes you wish and save or enter another override.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===User overrides===&lt;br /&gt;
To change a quiz setting for a particular user or users, click the &amp;quot;add user override&amp;quot;button in &#039;&#039;Quiz Administration&amp;gt;Group overrides&#039;&#039;, make the changes you wish and save or enter another override.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:groupuseroverride.png|groupuseroverride.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quiz module has additional settings which may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Quiz&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
;Auto-save period&lt;br /&gt;
:If enabled, student responses will be saved 1, 2, or 5 minutes (according to selection) after they have typed an answer. It will only save if the answers have been changed so will remain idle if no changes are made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:This is useful for students who may take a long time to answer a question (like an Essay) or experience a connection problem that would previously have caused their work to be lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:This feature works by &#039;listening&#039; for changes in the answers then starting the auto-save timer (at 60, 120 or 300 seconds). When the timer reaches zero all the answers on the page are sent to the Moodle server in the background, the student will not notice anything. The Moodle server then saves those answers that have changed. If no changes are made by the student the timer will not start and nothing will happen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Although there will be some additional server load it is minimal and much less than the alternative of putting one question per page to ensure frequent saves of student work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How questions behave can be configured in &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Question behaviours&amp;gt;Manage question &lt;br /&gt;
behaviours&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Test konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/MCLGZTpfG60 Moodle 2.x Quiz]  MoodleBites video on YouTube   &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://school.demo.moodle.net/mod/quiz/view.php?id=1496  School demo example of a quiz with CBM]  Log into with username &amp;quot;parent&amp;quot; and password &amp;quot;moodle&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=225920 Forum thread: Certainty based marking - too harsh?]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://helderenwijzer.nl/2011/10/certainty-based-marking-in-moodle/ Blog post on CBM (Certainty Based Marking)in Moodle]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Ajouter/modifier un test]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones del examen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Question_bank&amp;diff=107885</id>
		<title>Question bank</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Question_bank&amp;diff=107885"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T01:52:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Managing questions}}&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows a teacher to create, preview, and edit questions in a database of question categories. The categories can be limited to being used on the site, course or quiz level.  The questions in a category can be added to a [[Quiz module|Quiz]] or to a [[Lesson module|lesson activity]] via an export process. The teacher enters the question bank by creating or editing a quiz activity or via &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Question bank&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Select a category==&lt;br /&gt;
Questions are organised into categories. Initially each course has only one category called &amp;quot;Default&amp;quot;. It is good practice to create more categories to organize your questions. This not only makes it easier to find questions, but makes the use of random questions and matching question easier. You can create a hierarchy of categories because you can create subcategories inside parent categories. To add or edit categories click on the &amp;quot;[[Question categories|Categories]]&amp;quot; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The question editing screen shows the questions from the currently selected category. You choose this category from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Category:&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down menu. Using the tick box below that menu you determine whether to also show the questions from all subcategories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Categories are shared in contexts===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are separate question category trees in each different &#039;context&#039; in which questions are shared. The contexts available to you depend on whether you access the question bank from an activity or from a course and depend on the permissions assigned you for access to questions. See [[Question contexts]] for more information on these contexts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add a new question==&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;Questions&#039;&#039; tab to access the Question Bank page, if not there already.&lt;br /&gt;
# From the &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down menu, select a category you want to add a question to.&lt;br /&gt;
# The page will change to show the questions already in that category&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the question type you want to create from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Create new question&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down menu.&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill in the form for the question type you are creating. Each [[Question types|question type]] has its own form and has its own options.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;Save Changes&#039;&#039; at the bottom of the form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preview, Edit, Delete, and Move==&lt;br /&gt;
The first column in the list of questions contains a number of icons and a selection box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Preview&#039;&#039;&#039; icon will open a preview window in which you can test the question. The &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; icon allows you to edit the question via the same form that you used to create it. The &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039; icon deletes the question, provided it is not already in use in some activity. The selection box allows you to select a subset of questions that you can then move to another category using the controls below the list of questions. The &#039;&#039;&#039;move&#039;&#039;&#039; icon allows you to move one question at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tips and tricks==&lt;br /&gt;
*Put the answer into the question name so you can quickly see the answers when students are asking for answers. This is especially useful if you&#039;re dealing with large sets of questions! (No option yet for viewing category or answer of question in the list of questions.)&lt;br /&gt;
*Export questions in GIFT or Moodle XML formats, then import them into a Lesson. (Future versions of Moodle will make Question bank available to both Lesson and Quiz activities.)&lt;br /&gt;
*Remember that while some of the same question types can be found in both the Quiz and Lesson modules, they can be very different.  Scoring and grading each student&#039;s choice is more robust in a Quiz.  On the other hand, each Lesson question answer also has a [[Jumps|jump]] associated it.&lt;br /&gt;
*Use GIFT or other export modes to print questions and answers in a category.  Hint, clever use of word processor macros, using search and replace, can tidy up a GIFT file for printing.&lt;br /&gt;
*The question title is useful in sorting and making notes. For example, &amp;quot;ZZ remove 2010-3 Why did the Moodler cross&amp;quot;, will put this question at the bottom of the list.  Or where you want a &#039;the&#039; questions in a category to appear in a specific order, use letters or numbers, knowing that AA will come first, AB will be second in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do a copy and paste from a PDF file into the question content area.  Reduces &amp;quot;other&amp;quot; hidden code which Word, Open Office and other programs can insert.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Sharing and Managing Question banks==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Be default, teachers can manage only the questions in the context of the courses they are in. You can set up a role to allow teachers to share and manager questions on a larger scale. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use this role to create a special system-wide &amp;quot;Question bank Manager&amp;quot; instead of giving admin level or site-wide Manager access to a person managing the Questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[How to let teachers share questions between courses]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/YQEx0PxRb4c Creating Quiz Questions (part 1)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/FGIh-5CYwzs Creating Quiz Questions (part 2)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/BRDbe7JcCBw Creating Quiz Questions (part 3)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Fragensammlung]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Banco de Preguntas]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Galdera-bankua]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:問題バンク]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Quiz_module&amp;diff=107884</id>
		<title>Quiz module</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Quiz_module&amp;diff=107884"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T01:50:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Activities}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Quiz&#039;&#039;&#039; activity module allows the teacher to design and build quizzes consisting of a large variety of [[Question types]], including multiple choice, true-false, and short answer questions. These questions are kept in the [[Question bank]] and can be re-used in different quizzes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Quizexample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Quiz settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Building Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Quiz reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Quiz FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Features ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Quizzes can be [[Quiz settings|configured]] to allow multiple attempts. Each attempt at a question is automatically marked, and the teacher can choose whether to give feedback and/or show the correct answers. &lt;br /&gt;
There are many ways to [[Using Quiz|use a quiz]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Feedback about performance and self-assessment are important parts of a learning environment. There are several ways to give feedback to students: on each question or overall. The quiz module can display feedback and scores at different times during the quiz, using the review options in the [[Quiz settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* A wide variety of [[Quiz reports]] (in addition to [[Grades]]) are available for use by the teacher. Quiz reports not only can focus on a single student&#039;s attempt to answer each question, but also can perform a robust item analysis of a question&#039;s validity based upon aggregated student responses. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* A single quiz can automatically select random and/or specific questions from different [[Question bank|categories]] of questions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There are different options for [[Editing a quiz|scoring (marks-grades)]] individual questions in a specific quiz, [[Adding/updating_a_quiz#Grades_section|grading attempts]] for a quiz and each [[Question types|question type]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The quiz settings allow different [[Adding/updating_a_quiz#Display_section|display methods]]. They can randomize the questions for each student and or randomize the answers for each student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The teacher can determine the number of questions on each page of questions the student sees.  The teacher can change the position of any question in the quiz. It is possible to put a label with information any place between questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The teacher can [[Quiz settings|choose]] how questions behave during the quiz. It can be like a classic test, where the student gets no feedback while attempting the test, only later. Alternatively, Moodle can reveal the grades and/or feedback to the student during the quiz, and perhaps even give them another chance to answer the question (for fewer marks) having read the feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The about list only mentions a few features of the quiz module and how it works with the question bank. Please follow the links on this page to learn more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=sfGlV5WaZE8 Quiz in Moodle 2.0 video]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/Word_table_format Microsoft Word table format add-on]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/YQEx0PxRb4c Creating Quiz Questions (part 1)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/FGIh-5CYwzs Creating Quiz Questions (part 2)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/BRDbe7JcCBw Creating Quiz Questions (part 3)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Módulo de examen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Galdetegiak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:小テストモジュール]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ru:Тест]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Test]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[pl:Quizy]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Test]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[zh:測驗卷]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Building_Quiz&amp;diff=107883</id>
		<title>Building Quiz</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Building_Quiz&amp;diff=107883"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T01:49:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Quiz}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How a Moodle quiz works==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The word “quiz” might  conjure up for some images of TV game shows, but a Moodle quiz is basically a set of questions presented to the learner which may be automatically marked by Moodle or graded later by the teacher. The questions may be in sentence or number  form or contain various media such as video or sound. They do not all need to be the same type of questions: a quiz may contain multiple choice, matching, essays (teacher-graded) and calculated. Feedback may be given at any or all stages of the process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once a quiz is made, that’s not the end of it. A Moodle quiz is environmentally friendly: its questions are saved in a [[Question bank]] and may be recycled for use elsewhere. Thus, Mr Brown  could create a Physics Quiz with 20 questions for his class, Class Brown, and his colleague Mr Smith sharing the course could save himself valuable time by resusing 5 of Mr Brown’s questions in his own General Science quiz for Class Smith. (See also [[How to let teachers share questions between courses|Question Sharer role]] for sharing questions across the site)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a quiz is a book, the [[Quiz settings]] are equivalent to the front cover; the quiz itself is contained within when the questions are created. (Be careful : once you have chosen the Quiz Settings, it will be “live” on your course page, unless  you hide it, so your learners could potentially see a quiz with no questions, like a front cover with no content.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once a quiz has been added to the course and the [[Quiz settings]] established,the teacher can start to build the quiz.  The teacher can access the quiz to edit the questions by clicking directly on the Quiz name on the course home page and then &amp;quot;Edit quiz&amp;quot; or by clicking the &amp;quot;info&amp;quot; link in the Navigation block. The &amp;quot;Edit quiz link can also be accessed from &#039;&#039;Settings&amp;gt;Quiz administration.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:editquiz.png|thumb|250px|Accessing the quiz to add or edit questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding questions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have accessed the quiz editing screen as above, you can add questions from a number of locations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Add question&amp;quot; button to begin a new question (1 below)&lt;br /&gt;
#Click &amp;quot;Show&amp;quot; (2a) to reveal the contents of the question bank (2b) and then choose a pre-made question or click &amp;quot;Create new question&amp;quot; (3)&lt;br /&gt;
#Click &amp;quot;Add a random question&amp;quot; to add a random question, &#039;&#039;providing there are questions in the question bank already&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:add question.png|thumb|300px|Adding a question]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Creating a new question===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#To make a brand new question, click &amp;quot;Add a question&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#From the next screen, choose the question type you want to add and click &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039;  &#039;&#039;When you click on a question type on the left, helpful information appears on the right&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Fill in the question form, making sure to give a grade to the correct answer.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:questionpicker.png|thumb|250px|Selecting a question type]]&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:questionadded.png|thumb|250px|A question when it has been created]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
====Adding responses and feedback====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}When you add responses and feedback you can hide or display the text editor:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:quizform1.png|thumb|250px|Without the editing tools]]&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:quizform2.png|thumb|250px|With the editing tools]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that when a question has been created, an icon and words display its type (eg multiple choice) and a magnifiying glass icon allows you to preview it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can continue adding questions this way, clicking the &amp;quot;Add a question&amp;quot; button each time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Choosing a pre-made question===&lt;br /&gt;
If other teachers in the course have made questions, or if a teacher made questions in an earlier quiz, these can be added to the current quiz by clicking the arrows next to them in the question bank (1 below) or by checking/ticking the box of several and then clicking the button &amp;quot;add to quiz&amp;quot; (2). To ensure all previously made questions are available, make sure to tick the boxes &amp;quot;also show questions from sub-categories/old questions&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:premadequestion.png|thumb|Using a previously made question]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a random question===&lt;br /&gt;
As long as you have questions in the question bank, you can add random questions to your quiz. This might be useful if you have students in a class taking a quiz at the same time, because they are unlikely to get the same questions at the same time. The same question will never appear twice in a quiz. If you include several random questions then different questions will always be chosen for each of them. If you mix random questions with non-random questions then the random questions will be chosen so that they do not duplicate one of the non-random questions. This does imply that you need to provide enough questions in the category from which the random questions are chosen, otherwise the student will be shown a friendly error message. The more questions you provide the more likely it will be that students get different questions on each attempt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The grade for the randomly chosen question will be rescaled so that the maximum grade is what you have chosen as the grade for the random question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add one or more random questions by choosing the number and category in the question bank. Note the die icon to highlight random question selection.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:randomquestions.png|thumb|Adding a random question]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:randomquestionadded.png|thumb|Random question selected for quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Quiz question tags====&lt;br /&gt;
Note that although it is possible to tag questions, the feature does not currently work. See forum discussion: https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=194119&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Question categories===&lt;br /&gt;
Questions can be stored and retrieved from categories in the Question bank. When you make a new question it defaults to the category with the course name. So if you make a quiz in the Senior Physics course, questions will automatically be added to &amp;quot;Default for Senior Physics&amp;quot;. You can opt to have your quiz questions in a category of their own (&amp;quot;Quizname&amp;quot;) or to add a subcategory.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
To add a subcategory, go to &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Quiz administration&amp;gt;Question bank&amp;gt;Categories&#039;&#039; For more information on question contexts and categories, see [[Question bank]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users will have access to different categories according to their permissions. For example, a regular teacher might only have access to question categories in his own Physics course whereas his Faculty Head of Science with permissions in all science courses might have access to question categories in Biology and Chemistry as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Quiz layout==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can choose in  &#039;&#039; Administration&amp;gt;Quiz administration&amp;gt;Edit settings&amp;gt;Layout&#039;&#039; whether to have a new page for every question or after a certain number of questions.&lt;br /&gt;
*You can click the &amp;quot;Add a page here&amp;quot; button to add a page at selected intervals and move questions up and down by clicking the arrow button.&lt;br /&gt;
*You can also set the pages by clicking the tab &amp;quot;Order and paging&amp;quot; on the Edit quiz screen.&lt;br /&gt;
*Questions may be moved up and down with the arrows, or you can check the boxes to their left and then click &amp;quot;reorder questions&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*You can check a box to select a question and then click &amp;quot;Add new pages after selected questions&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*You can &amp;quot;repaginate&amp;quot; by setting the number of questions per page.  After setting the number of questions per page, you can move questions so that there are a different number of questions on each page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:paging1.png|thumb|Moving questions and adding pages]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:orderandpaging.png|thumb|Order and paging]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:repaginate.png|thumb|Repaginating]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assigning points to questions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Quiz administration &amp;gt; Edit quiz &amp;gt; Editing quiz&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set how many points each question is worth by changing the number in the box to the right of each question (1) and you can change the maximum grade by changing the number in the box at the top of the quiz (2) The default is one point per question and 100.00 maximum grade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:gradingquiz.png|thumb|250px|Points per question and max grade]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
:Tip: Each save button is independent of each other.   Thus if you change 2 grade boxes and click on the &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; button, only the grade next to that button will be saved.  Your other changes will revert to what they were before.  Best practice is to change the grade and save one question at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quiz module will do any maths, so for example, a 2 point question will be  worth 2 times more when the Quiz module determines how many point out of 10 to award the student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Previewing the quiz==&lt;br /&gt;
*You can preview individual questions by clicking the magnifying glass icon.&lt;br /&gt;
*You can preview the whole quiz by clicking the &amp;quot;Preview&amp;quot; link in &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Quiz administration&amp;gt;Preview&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*The quiz works like a real quiz so you can see your grades and any feedback for correct/incorrect answers just as a student would see them.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:previewquestion.png|thumb|200px|Previewing a single question]]&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:previewquiz.png|thumb|200px|Click to preview the whole quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:quizpreviewed.png|thumb|200px|Quiz in preview mode]]&lt;br /&gt;
|  [[File:quizincorrect.png|thumb|200px|Quiz feedback for incorrect answer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==After quiz has been attempted==&lt;br /&gt;
If one or more students have taken the quiz, you will see a list of all the questions in the quiz and a notice saying that you cannot add or remove questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change the order of questions, regrade them, preview an individual question and click on an question edit link that will allow you to directly edit the question stored in the question bank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; You can delete all quiz attempts by students and then edit the quiz as if no students had attempted it.  To do this,click the quiz name and then the Results link in the Navigation  block.  This will present a list of students and their scores.  Click &amp;quot;Select all&amp;quot; and then &amp;quot;Delete selected attempts&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dealing with faulty questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several ways to deal with &amp;quot;bad&amp;quot; questions in a quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
::*Change the grade for the bad question to 0 in the quiz.  &lt;br /&gt;
::*Edit the question, changing what you will accept as a correct answer, then regrading the exam.  Remember when changing a question that the next time it is used it will be as it was in the last edit.  Also, regrading will only affect one quiz at a time.    &lt;br /&gt;
::*You can edit the question to explain the situation to the student and then you can set the grade for the question to zero. After you make such changes you should regrade the quiz by clicking on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Results&#039;&#039;&#039; tab and then the &#039;&#039;&#039;Regrade&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.  This will change the grade for all students who have taken the quiz so far.  Remember, if the question is used by another quiz, your &amp;quot;explanation&amp;quot; will appear as part of that quiz. &lt;br /&gt;
::*You can change the grade for the bad question and then move or delete the question from your question category.  The question will still appear on the quiz. Some places do not like to delete any question, but will move them to a &amp;quot;dead&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;bad&amp;quot; question category. &lt;br /&gt;
::*When you discover a bad question in your quiz, it may affect the question bank. Remember that a final might be made up of a certain number of random questions drawn from different question categories, the same categories used in a smaller subject quiz. It can be very important do something about bad or invalid questions in a question category when the categories are use in other places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Questions]] in [[Managing a Moodle course]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/YQEx0PxRb4c Creating Quiz Questions (part 1)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/FGIh-5CYwzs Creating Quiz Questions (part 2)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/BRDbe7JcCBw Creating Quiz Questions (part 3)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Test erstellen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Construyendo un examen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Quiz_module&amp;diff=107882</id>
		<title>Quiz module</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Quiz_module&amp;diff=107882"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T01:48:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Activities}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Quiz&#039;&#039;&#039; activity module allows the teacher to design and build quizzes consisting of a large variety of [[Question types]], including multiple choice, true-false, and short answer questions. These questions are kept in the [[Question bank]] and can be re-used in different quizzes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Quizexample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Quiz settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Building Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Quiz reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Quiz FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Features ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Quizzes can be [[Quiz settings|configured]] to allow multiple attempts. Each attempt at a question is automatically marked, and the teacher can choose whether to give feedback and/or show the correct answers. &lt;br /&gt;
There are many ways to [[Using Quiz|use a quiz]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Feedback about performance and self-assessment are important parts of a learning environment. There are several ways to give feedback to students: on each question or overall. The quiz module can display feedback and scores at different times during the quiz, using the review options in the [[Quiz settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* A wide variety of [[Quiz reports]] (in addition to [[Grades]]) are available for use by the teacher. Quiz reports not only can focus on a single student&#039;s attempt to answer each question, but also can perform a robust item analysis of a question&#039;s validity based upon aggregated student responses. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* A single quiz can automatically select random and/or specific questions from different [[Question bank|categories]] of questions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There are different options for [[Editing a quiz|scoring (marks-grades)]] individual questions in a specific quiz, [[Adding/updating_a_quiz#Grades_section|grading attempts]] for a quiz and each [[Question types|question type]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The quiz settings allow different [[Adding/updating_a_quiz#Display_section|display methods]]. They can randomize the questions for each student and or randomize the answers for each student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The teacher can determine the number of questions on each page of questions the student sees.  The teacher can change the position of any question in the quiz. It is possible to put a label with information any place between questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The teacher can [[Quiz settings|choose]] how questions behave during the quiz. It can be like a classic test, where the student gets no feedback while attempting the test, only later. Alternatively, Moodle can reveal the grades and/or feedback to the student during the quiz, and perhaps even give them another chance to answer the question (for fewer marks) having read the feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The about list only mentions a few features of the quiz module and how it works with the question bank. Please follow the links on this page to learn more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=sfGlV5WaZE8 Quiz in Moodle 2.0 video]&lt;br /&gt;
*[https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/Word_table_format Microsoft Word table format add-on]&lt;br /&gt;
http://youtu.be/YQEx0PxRb4c Creating Quiz Questions (part 1) &lt;br /&gt;
http://youtu.be/FGIh-5CYwzs Creating Quiz Questions (part 2) &lt;br /&gt;
http://youtu.be/BRDbe7JcCBw Creating Quiz Questions (part 3) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Módulo de examen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Galdetegiak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:小テストモジュール]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ru:Тест]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Test]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[pl:Quizy]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Test]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[zh:測驗卷]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Question_bank&amp;diff=107881</id>
		<title>Question bank</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Question_bank&amp;diff=107881"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T01:47:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Managing questions}}&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows a teacher to create, preview, and edit questions in a database of question categories. The categories can be limited to being used on the site, course or quiz level.  The questions in a category can be added to a [[Quiz module|Quiz]] or to a [[Lesson module|lesson activity]] via an export process. The teacher enters the question bank by creating or editing a quiz activity or via &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Question bank&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Select a category==&lt;br /&gt;
Questions are organised into categories. Initially each course has only one category called &amp;quot;Default&amp;quot;. It is good practice to create more categories to organize your questions. This not only makes it easier to find questions, but makes the use of random questions and matching question easier. You can create a hierarchy of categories because you can create subcategories inside parent categories. To add or edit categories click on the &amp;quot;[[Question categories|Categories]]&amp;quot; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The question editing screen shows the questions from the currently selected category. You choose this category from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Category:&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down menu. Using the tick box below that menu you determine whether to also show the questions from all subcategories.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Categories are shared in contexts===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are separate question category trees in each different &#039;context&#039; in which questions are shared. The contexts available to you depend on whether you access the question bank from an activity or from a course and depend on the permissions assigned you for access to questions. See [[Question contexts]] for more information on these contexts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add a new question==&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;&#039;Questions&#039;&#039; tab to access the Question Bank page, if not there already.&lt;br /&gt;
# From the &#039;&#039;&#039;Category&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down menu, select a category you want to add a question to.&lt;br /&gt;
# The page will change to show the questions already in that category&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the question type you want to create from the &#039;&#039;&#039;Create new question&#039;&#039;&#039; drop-down menu.&lt;br /&gt;
# Fill in the form for the question type you are creating. Each [[Question types|question type]] has its own form and has its own options.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;Save Changes&#039;&#039; at the bottom of the form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preview, Edit, Delete, and Move==&lt;br /&gt;
The first column in the list of questions contains a number of icons and a selection box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Preview&#039;&#039;&#039; icon will open a preview window in which you can test the question. The &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; icon allows you to edit the question via the same form that you used to create it. The &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039; icon deletes the question, provided it is not already in use in some activity. The selection box allows you to select a subset of questions that you can then move to another category using the controls below the list of questions. The &#039;&#039;&#039;move&#039;&#039;&#039; icon allows you to move one question at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tips and tricks==&lt;br /&gt;
*Put the answer into the question name so you can quickly see the answers when students are asking for answers. This is especially useful if you&#039;re dealing with large sets of questions! (No option yet for viewing category or answer of question in the list of questions.)&lt;br /&gt;
*Export questions in GIFT or Moodle XML formats, then import them into a Lesson. (Future versions of Moodle will make Question bank available to both Lesson and Quiz activities.)&lt;br /&gt;
*Remember that while some of the same question types can be found in both the Quiz and Lesson modules, they can be very different.  Scoring and grading each student&#039;s choice is more robust in a Quiz.  On the other hand, each Lesson question answer also has a [[Jumps|jump]] associated it.&lt;br /&gt;
*Use GIFT or other export modes to print questions and answers in a category.  Hint, clever use of word processor macros, using search and replace, can tidy up a GIFT file for printing.&lt;br /&gt;
*The question title is useful in sorting and making notes. For example, &amp;quot;ZZ remove 2010-3 Why did the Moodler cross&amp;quot;, will put this question at the bottom of the list.  Or where you want a &#039;the&#039; questions in a category to appear in a specific order, use letters or numbers, knowing that AA will come first, AB will be second in the list.&lt;br /&gt;
*Do a copy and paste from a PDF file into the question content area.  Reduces &amp;quot;other&amp;quot; hidden code which Word, Open Office and other programs can insert.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Sharing and Managing Question banks==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Be default, teachers can manage only the questions in the context of the courses they are in. You can set up a role to allow teachers to share and manager questions on a larger scale. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also use this role to create a special system-wide &amp;quot;Question bank Manager&amp;quot; instead of giving admin level or site-wide Manager access to a person managing the Questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[How to let teachers share questions between courses]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
http://youtu.be/YQEx0PxRb4c Creating Quiz Questions (part 1) &lt;br /&gt;
http://youtu.be/FGIh-5CYwzs Creating Quiz Questions (part 2) &lt;br /&gt;
http://youtu.be/BRDbe7JcCBw Creating Quiz Questions (part 3) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Fragensammlung]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Banco de Preguntas]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Galdera-bankua]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:問題バンク]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Installing_add-ons&amp;diff=107880</id>
		<title>Installing add-ons</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Installing_add-ons&amp;diff=107880"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T01:35:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Installing Moodle}}&lt;br /&gt;
An add-on is an optional plugin for adding additional features and functionality to Moodle, such as new activities, new quiz question types, new reports, integrations with other systems and many more. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What is meant by the words &#039;plugin&#039; and &#039;add-on&#039;?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle = core code + plugins&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Plugins may be either standard plugins (included in the Moodle download package) or add-ons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Considerations for production sites (skip if you&#039;re just moodling) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;VERY IMPORTANT&#039;&#039;&#039; Warning: Please be aware that some add-ons have not been reviewed, and the quality and/or suitability for your Moodle site has not been checked. Please be careful. It may not do what you expect, it may have serious security issues or it may even not work at all. This is however improving over time with the evolving new plugins directory system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you have a large site for production purposes consider if you &#039;&#039;&#039;really&#039;&#039;&#039; need the add-on? More functionality means more things to support, more things to (potentially) go wrong and more things to worry about at upgrade time. &lt;br /&gt;
* Is the add-on supported and maintained? If something goes wrong can you get support? Will bugs be fixed?&lt;br /&gt;
* If the add-on does not work in a future version of Moodle, what will you do about it?&lt;br /&gt;
* Beware of &#039;&#039;patches&#039;&#039; ([https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&amp;amp;id=38 Moodle Plugins Directory Other category]) ! If an add-on modifies or replaces core files then be very careful. It can only be guaranteed to work with the exact build (version) of Moodle it was created for and is highly unlikely to survive a Moodle upgrade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installing an add-on==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To install an add-on, its source code must be put (deployed) into the appropriate location inside the Moodle installation directory and the main administration page &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Notifications&#039;&#039; must be visited. There are three ways how the add-on code can be deployed into Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}In Moodle 2.5 onwards, an add-on code may be deployed from within Moodle, either directly from the Moodle plugins directory or by uploading a ZIP file. The web server process has to have write access to the plugin type folder where the new add-on is to be installed in order to use either of these methods.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, an add-on code may be deployed manually at the server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installing directly from the Moodle plugins directory===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Login as an admin and go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Install add-ons&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the button &#039;Install add-ons from Moodle plugins directory&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Search for a plugin with an Install button (i.e. suitable for 2.5), click the Install button then click Continue.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check that you obtain a &#039;Validation passed!&#039; message, then click the button &#039;Install add-on&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installing via uploaded ZIP file===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the [https://moodle.org/plugins Moodle plugins directory], select Moodle 2.5 as version, then choose an add-on with a Download button and download the ZIP file.&lt;br /&gt;
# Login to your Moodle site as an admin and go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Install add-ons&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload the ZIP file, select the appropriate plugin type, tick the acknowledgement checkbox, then click the button &#039;Install add-on from the ZIP file&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Check that you obtain a &#039;Validation passed!&#039; message, then click the button &#039;Install add-on&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:install add-ons.png|thumb|Install add-ons]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:add-on package validation.png|thumb|Add-on package validation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For both of the above methods, after clicking the button &#039;Install add-on&#039;, you will then be automatically redirected to &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Notifications&#039;&#039; and the installation process (i.e. creating required database tables etc) will happen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installing manually at the server===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you can&#039;t deploy the add-on code via the administration web interface, you have to copy it to the server file system manually (e.g. if the web server process does not have write access to the Moodle installation tree to do this for you).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, establish the correct place in the Moodle code tree for the add-on type. Common locations are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* /path/to/moodle/theme/ - themes&lt;br /&gt;
* /path/to/moodle/mod/ - activity modules and resources&lt;br /&gt;
* /path/to/moodle/blocks/ - sidebar blocks&lt;br /&gt;
* /path/to/moodle/question/type/ - question types&lt;br /&gt;
* /path/to/moodle/course/format/ - course formats&lt;br /&gt;
* /path/to/moodle/admin/report/ - admin reports&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[:dev:Plugins]] for the full list of all plugin types and their locations within the Moodle tree.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the [https://moodle.org/plugins Moodle plugins directory], select Moodle 2.5 as version, then choose an add-on with a Download button and download the ZIP file.&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload or copy it to your Moodle server.&lt;br /&gt;
# Unzip it in the right place for the plugin type (or follow add-on instructions). &lt;br /&gt;
# In your Moodle site (as admin) go to &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Notifications&#039;&#039; (you should, for most plugin types, get a message saying the add-on is installed).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: The add-on may contain language files.  They&#039;ll be found by your Moodle automatically. These language strings can be customized using the standard &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Language&#039;&#039; editing interface. If you get a &amp;quot;Database error&amp;quot; when you try to edit your language files, there is a strong chance that the language files included within the downloaded ZIP file of this add-on have a coding problem. If you delete the &#039;&#039;plugin_name/lang/other_language_different_to_English/&#039;&#039; folder with the new language strings and the database error disappears, this is indeed the case. Please notify the plugin maintainer, so that it can be fixed in future releases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Troubleshooting==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Errors===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you obtain an error, please [[Debugging|turn debugging on]] to obtain additional information about the cause of the error.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;tool_installaddon/err_curl_exec - cURL error 60 : This suggests problems with the validation of the SSL certificate of the remote (moodle.org) site. This is also a known problem in Moodle Windows 7 servers running the Moodle package for Windows. See [[SSL certificate for moodle.org]] for more info and possible solutions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===When installing manually===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Check the file permissions. The web server needs to be able to read the plugin files. If the the rest of Moodle works then try to make the plugin permissions and ownership match. &lt;br /&gt;
* Did you &#039;&#039;&#039;definitely&#039;&#039;&#039; unzip or install the add-on in the correct place?&lt;br /&gt;
* Because Moodle scans plugin folders for new plugins you cannot have any other files or folders there. Make sure you deleted the zip file and don&#039;t try to rename (for example) an old version of the plugin to some other name - it will break.&lt;br /&gt;
* Make sure the directory name for the plugin is correct. All the names &#039;&#039;&#039;have&#039;&#039;&#039; to match. If you change the name then it won&#039;t work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Obtaining help===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ask in the appropriate forum in [http://moodle.org/course/view.php?id=5 Using Moodle]. Make sure you describe your system (including versions of MySQL, PHP etc.), what you tried and what happened. Copy and paste error messages exactly. Provide the link to the version of the add-on you downloaded (some have very similar names).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Uninstalling an add-on==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To uninstall an add-on&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Plugins overview&#039;&#039; and click the Uninstall link opposite the add-on you wish to remove&lt;br /&gt;
# Use a file manager to remove/delete the actual plugin directory as instructed, otherwise Moodle will reinstall it next time you access the site administration&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Certain plugin types offer the removal from the disk as well, though not yet all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Plugins overview==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:plugins overview.png|thumb|left|Plugins overview highlighting available update with install button]]The Plugins overview page in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Plugins overview&#039;&#039; lists all installed plugins, together with the version number, availability (enabled or disabled) and settings link (if applicable).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &#039;Check for available updates&#039; button enables admins to quickly check for any updates available to standard plugins or add-ons installed on the site (from the [http://moodle.org/plugins plugins directory]). Any updates available are highlighted, with further information and a download link in the notes column opposite the plugin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Plugin updating from within Moodle===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Moodle 2.4 onwards, an administrator can enable updates deployment in  &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; Update notifications&#039;&#039;. Then when updates are available, &#039;Install this update&#039; buttons are shown on the Plugins overview page. See [[Automatic updates deployment]] for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preventing installing add-ons from within Moodle==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If required, installing and updating from within Moodle can be prevented by copying the following lines of code from config-dist.php and pasting them in config.php.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Use the following flag to completely disable the On-click add-on installation&lt;br /&gt;
 // feature and hide it from the server administration UI.&lt;br /&gt;
 //&lt;br /&gt;
 //      $CFG-&amp;gt;disableonclickaddoninstall = true;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Notifications]] for further details of update notifications&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Add-on Review Criteria]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Add-on FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=44 General add-ons forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Installing Moodle from Git repository#Installing a contributed extension from its Git repository|Installing a contributed extension from its Git repository]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.somerandomthoughts.com/blog/2013/05/07/managing-add-ons-in-moodle-2-5/ Managing add-ons in Moodle 2.5] blog post by Gavin Henrick&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/RxlmVzIllVk Moodle 2 Plugins Administration]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For developers:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[:dev:Category:Plugins|Plugins developer documentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[:dev:Plugin validation]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[:dev:On-click add-on installation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Plugins installieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Instalando plugins]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Page_resource_settings&amp;diff=107879</id>
		<title>Page resource settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Page_resource_settings&amp;diff=107879"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T01:29:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Page}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding a new page to your course==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*From the the &amp;quot;Add an activity or resource&amp;quot; link (or, if not present, the &amp;quot;Add a resource&amp;quot; drop down menu),choose [[Page]] All settings may expanded by clicking the &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; link top right.&lt;br /&gt;
*In the &amp;quot;Adding a new page&amp;quot; screen that follows, give your page a name and a description (which may or may not be required according to admin settings)&lt;br /&gt;
*Add your content to the Page content section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:pagegeneral25.png|thumb|General settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
===Name===&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever you type here will form the link learners click on to view the page so it is helpful to give it a name that suggests its purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
Add a description of your page here. Click &amp;quot;Show editing tools&amp;quot; to display the rich text editor, and drag the bottom right of the text box out to expand it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Display description on the course page===&lt;br /&gt;
If this box is ticked, the description will appear on the course page just below the name of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Content==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:pagecontent25.png|thumb|Content settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Add your page content here. You can use the features of the [[Text editor|Text editor]] to add media, images, links and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Appearance==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:pageappearance252.png|thumb|Appearance settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose here whether or not to display the page name and/or description along with the page content when a user clicks on the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the administrator has allowed both &#039;open&#039; and &#039;pop-up&#039; as display options (&#039;&#039;from Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Activity modules&amp;gt;Page&#039;&#039;), you will have additonal display settings here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]] &lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access/Activity completion==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These settings are visible if [[Conditional activities]] and [[Activity completion]] have been enabled in the site and the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Page module capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/page:view|View page content]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/page:addinstance|Add a new page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The page module has additional settings which may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Page&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require activity description===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows you to turn off the requirement for users to type something into the description box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Available display options===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows you to add different ways the resource may be displayed on the course page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default values for activity settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can set the defaults for this resource. You can also choose which setting(s) to class as &amp;quot;Advanced&amp;quot;. These settings will only then appear if the user clicks &amp;quot;Show advanced&amp;quot; in the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/LGXmnk59BQM Moodle 2.x Adding Content - Page ]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Textseite konfigurieren]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Advanced_features&amp;diff=107878</id>
		<title>Advanced features</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Advanced_features&amp;diff=107878"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T01:25:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Managing a Moodle site}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Advanced features screen in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Advanced features&#039;&#039; contains a number of features that may be enabled/disabled globally by the site administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Outcomes]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Comments]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Tags|Tags functionality]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Notes]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Portfolios]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Web services]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Messaging]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Statistics]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[RSS feeds]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Blogs]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[MNet|Networking]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Activity completion|Completion tracking]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Conditional_activities|Conditional access]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Plagiarism Prevention|Plagiarism plugins]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Badges]] (new in 2.5)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Show advanced==&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Many pages have a &amp;quot;Show advanced&amp;quot; button which reveals extra options for the user to select from. This is not connected to the Advanced features screen.&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/d3D77TfI8wA Moodle 2.0 Notifications, Register and Advanced features]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Funtzio_aurreratuak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Zusatzoptionen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Fonctions avancées]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Site_registration&amp;diff=107877</id>
		<title>Site registration</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Site_registration&amp;diff=107877"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T01:24:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Server settings}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Moodle.org registration==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Registration.png|thumb|Moodle.org registration]]An administrator can register their site with moodle.org in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Registration&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you register your site with Moodle.org&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You are added to a low-volume mailing list for important notifications such as security alerts and new releases of Moodle&lt;br /&gt;
* Statistics about your site will be added to the statistics of the worldwide Moodle community http://moodle.org/stats/&lt;br /&gt;
* Your site is also registered with [http://moodle.net/ Moodle.net], allowing users with the [[Capabilities/moodle/course:publish|publish courses capability]] (by default only managers) the option of publishing courses to Moodle.net&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish, you can choose for your site to be listed in http://moodle.org/sites/.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To register your site:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Registration&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Register with moodle.org now&#039; button&lt;br /&gt;
# Review the registration information, amending as necessary&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Update registration on moodle.org&#039; button at the bottom of the page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After registering, Moodle.net will be listed on &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; Hubs&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may change the registration information at any time by updating your registration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Updated site statistics are sent to moodle.org automatically every 7 days.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: it can sometimes take a little while (some days) for information to appear on http://moodle.org/sites&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Only sites which are publicly available on the Internet are eligible to be registered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Registering with other hubs==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can register their site with other community hubs in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; Hubs&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A public hub may be selected from the list or a private hub URL and password may be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you add the [[Community finder block]] to courses on your site, teachers, non-editing teachers and managers (and any other users with the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/community:add|moodle/community:add]]) will be able to access the hub and search for courses for download or to enrol in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unregistering from a hub==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may unregister from a hub at any time by clicking the unregister button. You will then be given the option to remove all courses currently being advertised on the hub and remove all courses that were uploaded to the hub.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/d3D77TfI8wA Moodle 2.0 Notifications, Register and Advanced features]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Usage]] for how statistics about Moodle sites are collected and maintained&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Community hub]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Moodle.net FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Hub]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja: サイト登録]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Moodle-Site registrieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Registro del sitio]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Notifications&amp;diff=107876</id>
		<title>Notifications</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Notifications&amp;diff=107876"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T01:23:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Security}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Update notifications==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can configure update notifications for both Moodle core code and any contributed plugins installed on the site in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; Update notifications&#039;&#039;. See [[Available update notifications]] for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Login failure notifications==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can set up login failure notification in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Security &amp;gt; Notifications&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Display login failures to===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set this to administrators to be warned of anyone attempting to steal student or teacher logins. When set, a link stating the number of failed logins appears in the top right corner of the page when an administrator logs in. Click the link to access the login error page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Email login failures===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you&#039;re concerned about login failures, you can set up email notification for administrators or any/all users who can change the site configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Threshold for email notifications===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the number of failed logins for a given user from a single computer that will trigger notification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: The number of failed login attempts that result in account lockout may be set in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Security &amp;gt; Site policies&#039;&#039; (new in 2.5).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Other notifications==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The version of Moodle used may be found in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Notifications&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other notifications listed on the page may include&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Upgrade warnings|&amp;quot;Alpha&amp;quot; development code warning]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Cron]] not run for at least 24 hours&lt;br /&gt;
* Database tables are using MyISAM database engine - see [[Migration from MyISAM to InnoDB]] for advice on what to do&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;quot;Enabling the PHP setting display_errors is not recommended on production sites because some error messages may reveal sensitive information about your server.&amp;quot; What you do about this is not explained. Making a php.ini file with &amp;quot;display_errors = off;&amp;quot; in it in the folder &amp;quot;with the script&amp;quot; (?) is one suggestion found by googling, but that may depend on your server.  &lt;br /&gt;
* Site not yet [[Site registration|registered]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/d3D77TfI8wA Moodle 2.0 Notifications, Register and Advanced features]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:dev:Available update notifications|Available update notifications developer documentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Notificaciones]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Jakinarazpenak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Notifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Benachrichtigungen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:通知]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=My_home&amp;diff=107875</id>
		<title>My home</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=My_home&amp;diff=107875"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T01:17:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Site appearance}}&lt;br /&gt;
==My home==&lt;br /&gt;
My home is a customisable &amp;quot;dashboard&amp;quot; page for providing users with links to their courses and activities within them, such as unread forum posts and upcoming assignments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
My home usually has the [[Course overview block]] in the central column. Users can customize their My home page and add and remove blocks by clicking the &#039;Customise this page&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| &lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:My home.png|thumb|My home]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Customising my home.png|thumb|Customising My home]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The navigation block includes a My home link directly above or below the Site home link. Once a regular user is logged in, the My courses link will also take them to their My home page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Default home page==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can set My home as the default home page for all logged-in users by selecting &#039;My home&#039; as default home page in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Navigation&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If &#039;User preference&#039; is selected as default home page, each user needs to navigate to either the &#039;Home Page&#039; or the &#039;My home&#039; page then via the &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; My profile settings&#039;&#039; click the &amp;quot;Make this my default home page&amp;quot; link. Note that this option only appears on the page that is not their current default home page.  Once selected, Moodle will remember which page to present them each time they log on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the Site administrator role cannot set My home as their default home page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setting the default My home page for new users==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator or manager (or other user with the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/my:configsyspages|moodle/my:configsyspages]]) can set which content (course overview, calendar, blocks) appears on the My home page for new users as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Access &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Default My home page&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the required blocks from the &amp;quot;Add a block&amp;quot; drop-down menu. [[Block settings|Configure]] each block as desired&lt;br /&gt;
# Reposition blocks using the arrow icons in the block headers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding a block to the My home page for all users==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can add a new block to the My home page for all existing users (not only new users) as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn editing on for the front page&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the block to the front page&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit where the block appears and set the page contexts to &#039;Display throughout the entire site&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to your My home page and again edit where the block appears and set &#039;Display on page types&#039; to &#039;My home page&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preventing users from customizing their My home page==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, users can customize their My home page and add blocks. An admin can prevent this as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit the authenticated user role and untick the [[Capabilities/moodle/my:manageblocks|Manage My home page blocks capability]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==My Moodle capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/moodle/my:manageblocks|Manage My home page blocks]] (see above)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/moodle/my:configsyspages|Configure system templates for My home pages]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, all blocks which may be added to a My home page have a &#039;&#039;myaddinstance&#039;&#039; capability (e.g. [[Capabilities/block/comments:myaddinstance|block/comments:myaddinstance]]) for controlling whether a user with a particular role can add the block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preventing users from adding a block to their My home page==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, users can add many blocks to their My home page. An admin can prevent them from adding a particular block, such as the [[Online users block]], as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit the authenticated user role and untick the [[Capabilities/block/online users:myaddinstance|Add a new online users block to the My home page capability]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Blocks not available on My home==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following blocks may not be added to a user&#039;s My home page (because it wouldn&#039;t make sense):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Course completion status block]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Course/site summary block]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Self completion block]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=un_pBYkeXXI My Home in Moodle 2.0 video]&lt;br /&gt;
*[Moodle 2.0 My Home http://youtu.be/5hD6l3xdSMI]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=168292 Latest news on My Moodle]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Nire_Moodle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Mon Moodle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Meine Startseite]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Location&amp;diff=107874</id>
		<title>Location</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Location&amp;diff=107874"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T01:08:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Admin tools}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Location settings==&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can change the following location settings in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Location &amp;gt; Location settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Default timezone====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the default time zone for date display. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Force default timezone====&lt;br /&gt;
Pull down menu to force the user to be in a specific timezone or allow users to individually select their timezone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Default country====&lt;br /&gt;
Select the country to appear by default on a new user account page form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===IP address lookup===&lt;br /&gt;
====GeoIP City data file====&lt;br /&gt;
Location of GeoIP City binary data file. This is a non-invasive way to determine geographical and other information about  Internet visitors in real-time. This file is not part of Moodle distribution and must be obtained separately from MaxMind.  There is a GeoIPLite version for free.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Google Maps API key====&lt;br /&gt;
Google Maps for IP address lookup visualization key. The Google Maps API lets you embed Google Maps with JavaScript.  This is free.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; There is no longer support for Google maps API V2 as it has been deprecated since 2010. V3 is now used. See here for details: https://developers.google.com/maps/documentation/javascript/tutorial#api_key&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After updating the information in this section, IP&#039;s that are displayed as a link, such as in reports, when clicked will open new window with a Google Map indicating the location of the IP, if found and if not a private address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Update timezones==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The update timezones page &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Location &amp;gt; Update timezones&#039;&#039; provides administrators with the option to update their local database with new information about world timezones. This is important because of daylight saving changes that many countries  use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the update is completed with success, Moodle will inform you how many entries were updated and which location was used as a source.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/L-_2N9gIiLo Moodle 2 Administration - Location]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Localización]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Kokagunea]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Lesson_settings&amp;diff=107873</id>
		<title>Lesson settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Lesson_settings&amp;diff=107873"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T00:50:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Lesson}}&lt;br /&gt;
=Lesson administration settings=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page explains the settings involved when first creating a lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
To add a lesson to your Moodle course page:&lt;br /&gt;
*With the editing turned on, in the section you wish to add your lesson, click the &amp;quot;Add an activity or resource&amp;quot; link (or, if not present, the &amp;quot;Add an activity&amp;quot; drop down menu) and choose &#039;&#039;Lesson&#039;&#039; All settings may expanded by clicking the &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; link top right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:lessongeneral25.png|thumb|General settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Name===&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever you type here will form the link learners click on to view the lesson so it is helpful to give it a name that suggests its purpose. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Appearance==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:lessonappearance25.png|thumb|Appearance settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
===File pop===&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to include a link to a file on the lesson page for students to refer to, upload it here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Progress bar===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this to show a bar at the bottom of the page showing how far into the lesson the student has got.&lt;br /&gt;
===Display ongoing score===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this to let students see their score as they work through the lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
===Display left menu=== &lt;br /&gt;
Choose this if you want to show a list of the pages in the Lesson so a student can see what is coming up.&lt;br /&gt;
===Minimum grade to display menu===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this if you want the student to go through the lesson once and get a grade before they can (on review) see and navigate through all the different pages.&lt;br /&gt;
===Slideshow===&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that slideshow mode currently does not work for Moodle 2. There is a tracker issue and patch here MDL-36673&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum Number of Answers===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can set the default number of answer boxes available when you add your question or content pages. For instance, if you are only going to use True/False, you would only need 2. You can change this at any time so it&#039;s not crucial.&lt;br /&gt;
===Use default feedback===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this if you want to show a set phrase regardless of their answer. If you have set your own default feedback such as &amp;quot;well done; correct&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;never mind; better luck next time&amp;quot; etc it will appear. If you have not, then Moodle&#039;s default feedback will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Link to next activity===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this to give students a link to another activity when they reach the end of the lesson. &#039;&#039;(Note: this can also be achieved using [[Conditional activities]])&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
==Availability==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:lessonavailability25.png|thumb|Availability settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
===Available from/Deadline===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can set a start and end date and time for your Lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
===Time limit=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Lesson Timer.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to set a time limit on the lesson. Students will see a countdown counter as they work. The timer does not stop them doing the lesson when the time is up, but  correct answers are no longer scored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Password protected lesson===&lt;br /&gt;
*Change to &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;  and enter the password if you want students only to access it when they know the password.&lt;br /&gt;
==Prerequisite lesson==&lt;br /&gt;
(These setings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:prerequisitelesson25.png|thumb|Prerequisite lesson settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Dependent on===&lt;br /&gt;
This allows access to the lesson to be dependent on students&#039; performance in another lesson in the same course. &#039;&#039;(Note: this can also be achieved with [[Conditional activities]])&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
===Time spent===&lt;br /&gt;
Decide here how long you want the student to have spent in the chosen previous lesson&lt;br /&gt;
===Completed===&lt;br /&gt;
Check this box if you want the student to have completed a previous lesson (according to [[Activity completion]] settings)&lt;br /&gt;
===Grade better than===&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the grade  from the previous lesson which you want the student to have exceeded before they can attempt the current lesson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Flow control==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:lessonflowcontrol25.png|thumb|Flow control settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow Student Review===&lt;br /&gt;
This puts a &amp;quot;Review Lesson&amp;quot; button on the last screen of the lesson to encourage the student to navigate through the lesson again from the start.  Be sure to check other settings to allow them to change their answers.&lt;br /&gt;
===Provide option to try a question again===&lt;br /&gt;
*This displays a button after an incorrectly answered question so that the student can try again (but not get credit for it)&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; Leave this off if you are using essay questions. &lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum Number of Attempts===&lt;br /&gt;
*Decide here how many times you want students to be able to attempt each question. When they reach the maximum, they will be taken automatically to the next page.&lt;br /&gt;
===Action after a Correct Answer===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose here where you want a student to be sent to if they get a question right. See [[Using Lesson]] for more details on this setting. The options are:&lt;br /&gt;
**the next part of the Lesson (default setting)&lt;br /&gt;
**a random, unexpected page&lt;br /&gt;
**a random page which they have not yet answered.&lt;br /&gt;
===Number of pages to show===&lt;br /&gt;
You only need this if you have set &amp;quot;Action after a correct answer&amp;quot; to show an unseen or unanswered page. Otherwise, all pages will be seen&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grade==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:lessongrade25.png|thumb|Grade settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Set a grade and grade category here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Practice lesson===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this if you don&#039;t need the lesson to be scored/graded but just need students to work through some pages. Set this to Yes to have the same ungraded type Lesson in earlier versions of Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Custom Scoring===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this to give a particular number score (negative or positive) to each answer&lt;br /&gt;
===Re-takes allowed===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose this if you want your students to be able to do the lesson more than once.&lt;br /&gt;
====Handling of re-take====&lt;br /&gt;
If you allow your students to re-take the lesson, then decide here if the grade for all lesson attempts is the mean or the maximum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Note that the Question Analysis always uses the answers from the first tries of the lesson. Re-takes by students are ignored.&lt;br /&gt;
===Minimum Number of Questions===&lt;br /&gt;
Set here the minimum number of questions that will be used to calculate a student&#039;s score. Students will  be told how many they have answered and how many more they need to answer.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you are using Content pages, then set this to 0.&lt;br /&gt;
*If you use this setting, then add some explanatory text at the start of the lesson so the student knows how many questions they must answer as a minimum. (They may answer more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access/Activity completion==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrict access and Activity completion settings are visible if [[Conditional activities]] and [[Activity completion]] have been enabled in the site and the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lesson module has additional settings which may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Lesson&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;The slideshow settings below do not work. See MDL-36673&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Slideshow width===&lt;br /&gt;
Sets the width of the slideshow only when this feature is enabled in a Lesson&#039;s &amp;quot;Change settings&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_slideshowwidth, Default 640.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Slideshow height===&lt;br /&gt;
Sets the height of the slideshow only when this feature is enabled in a Lesson&#039;s &amp;quot;Change settings&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_slideshowheight, Default 480.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Slideshow background colour===&lt;br /&gt;
Background colour to for the slideshow if it is enabled. &lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_slideshowbgcolor, Default #FFFFFF.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Popup window width===&lt;br /&gt;
Sets the width of the popup displayed for a linked media file&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_mediawidth, Default 640.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Popup window  height===&lt;br /&gt;
Sets the height of the popup displayed for a linked media file&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_mediaheight, Default 480.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Show close button:===&lt;br /&gt;
Displays a close button as part of the popup generated for a linked media file&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_mediaclose, Default No.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Number of high scores displayed===&lt;br /&gt;
Sets the number of high scores to display&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_maxhighscores, Default: 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum number of answers===&lt;br /&gt;
Default maximum number of answers per page for site&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_maxanswers, Default: 4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Action after correct answer===&lt;br /&gt;
The default action to take after a correct answer&lt;br /&gt;
*Variable name: lesson_defaultnextpage, Default: Normal - follow lesson path&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/cUDV0WE5ZYY Moodle 2.x Lesson (part 1)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/Mfj-8w-Ze0A Moodle 2.x Lesson (part 2)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/jXjqHtgC9c0 Moodle 2.x Lesson (part 3)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Lektion konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Ajouter/modifier une leçon]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:レッスンの設定]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Lesson_module&amp;diff=107872</id>
		<title>Lesson module</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Lesson_module&amp;diff=107872"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T00:49:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Activities}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Lesson icon.gif]] The lesson module presents a series of HTML pages to the student who is usually asked to make some sort of choice underneath the content area. The choice will send them to a specific page in the Lesson. In a Lesson page&#039;s simplest form, the student can select a continue button at the bottom of the page, which will send them to the next page in the Lesson. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Lessonexample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Lesson settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Building Lesson]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Lesson]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Lesson FAQ]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 basic Lesson page types that the student will see: question pages and content pages.  There are also several advanced navigational pages which can meet more specialized needs of the Teacher. The Lesson module was designed to be adaptive and to use a student&#039;s choices to create a self directed lesson.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main difference between a Lesson and other activity modules available in Moodle comes from its adaptive ability. With this tool, each choice the students makes can show a different teacher response/comment and send the student to a different page in the lesson. Thus with planning, the Lesson module can customize the presentation of content and questions to each student with no further action required by the teacher.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=207365&amp;amp;parent=910023#p910107 Difference between Lesson and Book]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/cUDV0WE5ZYY Moodle 2.x Lesson (part 1)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/Mfj-8w-Ze0A Moodle 2.x Lesson (part 2)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/jXjqHtgC9c0 Moodle 2.x Lesson (part 3)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Lesson]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Módulo de lección]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Ikasgaiak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Leçon]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Lektion]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Language_customization&amp;diff=107871</id>
		<title>Language customization</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Language_customization&amp;diff=107871"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T00:44:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Language}}&lt;br /&gt;
Words or phrases (in any language) used on the site may be easily changed by an administrator using the language customization feature. For example, you may want to change the word &amp;quot;Course&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;Unit&amp;quot;. The process consists of 4 steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Check-out the strings&lt;br /&gt;
# Filter the strings you wish to customize&lt;br /&gt;
# Customize the strings&lt;br /&gt;
# Save and check-in the strings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Quick instructions for the impatient ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Language&amp;gt; Language customization&#039;&#039; page.&lt;br /&gt;
# Pick the language to customize from the pull down list.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;Open languge pack for editing&amp;quot; button. This may take time to process.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click or Ctrl+Click to select files on the &amp;quot;Filter strings&amp;quot; interface.  Notice files are grouped.  For example, you will find the lesson strings under &amp;quot;mod&amp;quot; and moodle.php under core.&lt;br /&gt;
# After selecting the file(s), it is possible to use &amp;quot;string must contain&amp;quot; and other filters. For example, look at only string text that has &amp;quot;teacher&amp;quot; the file(s) you selected.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &amp;quot;Save changes and continue editing&amp;quot; if you want to pick another filter or PHP file(s) to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &amp;quot;Save and check in string into files&amp;quot; to save all changes you have made.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; Do not see any string changes?  Did you remember to use the &amp;quot;Save and check in string into files&amp;quot; button? Did you refresh your browser so it is not looking at a cached page? Did you edit the language file that is actually being used in your site, course or by the user?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; Can&#039;t find the string you wish to change? Tick the &#039;Show origin of languages strings&#039; checkbox in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Development &amp;gt; Debugging&#039;&#039; then visit the page containing the string you want to customize.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle is translated into many languages - see [http://download.moodle.org/langpack/ Moodle.org: Language packs] for their list and the translation completion status. The translations are distributed in so called language packages (or just lang packs) that are maintained by kind volunteers, community contributors and Moodle partners. Please read the page [[Translation]] first to understand how the whole localization machinery works.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle site administrators can customize any language pack to fit their individual needs (for example to use the term &amp;quot;Unit&amp;quot; instead of &amp;quot;Course&amp;quot;). You are discouraged from direct editing the files coming as a part official language pack. Such changes would be silently overwritten during the next upgrade. Instead, you should create a local language pack that holds all your changes from the official pack.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Local language packs have the same structure as the official ones. They are saved in your Moodle data directory in moodledata/lang/xx_local/ folder where &#039;xx&#039; is the code of the language. You have to have the official language pack installed before you can customize it. Local language pack should contain just strings you have customized - you should not copy whole official language packs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When displaying a string, Moodle first looks if a local customization of it exists in moodledata/lang/xx_local/component_file.php. If so, it is used. If not, the string from the official language pack is used (eventually, if the string has not been translated yet, the original English version is displayed). Please note that the strings are cached for better performance so you have to purge Moodle caches after you modify a file in your xx_local pack (caches are purged automatically if you use the tool described below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Using Language customization tool ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle comes with a tool that allows you to edit your local language pack via web interface. This tool is available for the site administrators in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Language &amp;gt; Language customization&#039;&#039;. Please refer to the following workflow diagram.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:customlang-process.png|800px|thumb|left|Workflow of the language customization (click to enlarge)]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;both&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Check out strings into translator ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the Language customization first page, select a language to customize and press the button &#039;Check out string into translator&#039;. During the checkout, Moodle loads the language strings from PHP files into its database. The language customization tool works with this database so the files in your xx_local pack are not touched unless your proceed to the final step of this workflow. If the xx_local language pack does not exist yet, Moodle automatically creates an empty one for you.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; There is currently a problem with &amp;quot;execution time&amp;quot;. If you get the &amp;quot;Fatal error: Maximum execution time of 180 seconds exceeded&amp;quot; message, you will have to press the button &#039;Check out string into translator&#039; several times to get the operation completed. See [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=163375 forum discussion].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Use filter to find the strings you want to customize ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Language_string_M2_filter.png|thumb|right|Moodle 2.0 language filter]]&lt;br /&gt;
After the checkout, use the &amp;quot;filter strings&amp;quot; form to find strings you want to customize for your site. Not selecting any filters will display all strings in the language pack.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Show strings of these components&#039;&#039; - Click or Ctrl+click to select one or more files that contain the string you want. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Customized only&#039;&#039; - check this field to display only those strings that are already present in your xx_local pack.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Help only&#039;&#039;&#039; - check this field to display only help tooltips, that is the texts used when clicking the yellow question mark icon. &lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039; Starting in Moodle 2.0, help string identifiers must end with _help suffix.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Modified only&#039;&#039; - displays only the strings that are modified in the current session. &lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039; The term &#039;customized&#039; means strings that are saved on disk in your xx_local pack directory. The term &#039;modified&#039; represents the changes made since the last checkin string into the language pack. Customized strings (already saved in a file) are highlighted with green. Modified strings (not saved in a file yet) are highlighted with blue. &lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; You may want to use this option look at your current work before you check it in.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Only strings containing&#039;&#039; - insert a phrase that must appear in the string. For example, if you put a word &#039;student&#039; here, you will get only those strings that contain this word. &lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; The &#039;Only strings&#039; filter can be used for a total search for a term used in your Moodle site for the selected language pack.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;String identifier&#039;&#039; - if you know the string identifier (it is the first parameter of the get_string() function), type it here. For example, the names of activity modules are defined in strings &#039;modulename&#039;. Finding where a particular string is saved can be difficult sometimes. The administrator can start a debugging function: Site administration&amp;gt;Development&amp;gt;Debugging and choose &amp;quot;Show origin of language strings&amp;quot;. Then if you append &amp;quot;?strings=1&amp;quot; (or &amp;quot;&amp;amp;strings=1&amp;quot; if there is already a parameter) to the end of the page URL, beside each string will be shown something like &amp;quot;{rememberusername/admin}&amp;quot;. The last part says which php file uses the string, so this one is in admin.php. If there is nothing after the / look in moodle.php. The first part, before the /, is the string identifier.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use combination of filter settings to get the required set of strings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click button &#039;Show strings&#039; for potential editing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Input your own translation ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The strings that pass all the conditions defined in the filter are displayed in a table. To replace the standard translation, put your own into the &#039;Local customization&#039; field. &lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039;If you want to delete your current customization , just delete the content of the &#039;Local customization&#039; field and click the &amp;quot;Save and continue editing&amp;quot;. The modifications that are going to be removed a customized string are highlighted in red.  If you made changes to a field previously &amp;quot;Save and continue editing&amp;quot; it will be highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Save and continue&amp;quot; button before you change the filter settings and show a new set of strings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saving your work into files ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As necessary, you may repeat the &amp;quot;show strings&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;local customization&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Save and continue&amp;quot; process.  When you have made all the changes you want to make:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Save and check in strings into files&amp;quot; to process all changes made in the translator database to your local language pack.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Writing the modifications into files ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the checkin, the contents of the translator database are dumped into files in moodledata/lang/xx_local/ directory. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Save and check in strings into files&amp;quot; to process all changes made into your local language pack.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039; this operation removes the directory first and then re-creates it with the actual data. Therefore it is reasonable to not to touch the files directly after you have checked out them into the translator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=219504 Duplicate entry &#039;en-373-AM&#039;] forum discussion about error when attempting to edit a lang pack&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/0v72GKn2Wuk Moodle 2 Language Administration settings]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Sprachanpassung]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Personalización del idioma]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Language_packs&amp;diff=107870</id>
		<title>Language packs</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Language_packs&amp;diff=107870"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T00:43:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Language}}&lt;br /&gt;
Over 100 language packs are available for an administrator to install on your Moodle site via &#039;&#039;Adminisration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Language &amp;gt; Language packs&#039;&#039;. Simply select the languages you require from the list of available language packs and click on the &amp;quot;Install selected language pack&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple language packs may be selected for install by holding down the Apple or Ctrl key whilst clicking on the language packs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Installing many (20+) language packs has [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=241098 almost 0 impact] on Moodle performance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All language packs, apart from English, are stored in &#039;&#039;moodledata/lang&#039;&#039; folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Parent language packs==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Certain language packs contain only the modified language strings from their parent language, rather than a complete set. Thus, it is necessary to install the parent language pack too. These language packs are:&lt;br /&gt;
* de_du, de_kids and de_comm (which requires de)&lt;br /&gt;
* es_ar, es_es (which requires es)&lt;br /&gt;
* fr_ca (which requires fr)&lt;br /&gt;
* en_us, en_ar, en_kids (which requires the default en)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Manual language pack installation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Language packs may also be installed manually by downloading the zip file from http://download.moodle.org/langpack/ to a directory called &#039;&#039;lang&#039;&#039; in your &#039;&#039;moodledata&#039;&#039; directory and then unzipping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Language pack updates==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Language packs can be updated via &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Language &amp;gt; Language packs&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can see which language packs have updates because they are listed in both &#039;Installed language packs&#039; and &#039;Available language packs&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* To update all installed language packs (except English and any local language packs) click the &#039;Update all installed language packs&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
* For sites with a large number of language packs installed, to update just a few installed language packs at a time, select the languages from the &#039;Available language packs&#039; list and click the &#039;Install selected language pack(s)&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
* The English language pack is updated automatically each time the site is upgraded.&lt;br /&gt;
* As most language packs are a work in progress, it is usually a good idea to update them regularly. Once a week/month might be a good frequency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=48492 Language import utility broken] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
*List of [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_ISO_639-1_codes language codes] on Wikipedia&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Translation]] and help us to translate Moodle to more languages&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/0v72GKn2Wuk Moodle 2 Language Administration settings]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Hizkuntza-paketeak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Paquetes de idioma]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Paquetages de langue]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:言語インポートユーティリティ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Sprachpakete]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[zh:语言倒入工具]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Language_settings&amp;diff=107869</id>
		<title>Language settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Language_settings&amp;diff=107869"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T00:41:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Language}}==User profile settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A user can set their preferred language for the site in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; My profile settings &amp;gt; Edit profile&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Course administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A teacher can force the language of their course in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Edit settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are a number of language settings for administrators in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Language &amp;gt; Language settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Language autodetect===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, Moodle detects a user&#039;s language from their browser setting. However, language auto-detection may be disabled so that the default site language is used instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default language===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the default language for the site. This setting can be overridden by users using the language menu or the setting in their user profile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If a preferred language is set in your browser then this will override the default site language (unless language auto-detection is disabled).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can enable localised error messages for database connection problems by add the following line to your [[Configuration file|config.php file]]:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 $CFG-&amp;gt;lang=&amp;quot;yourlangcode&amp;quot;;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Display language menu===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This sets whether the language menu is displayed on the login page and the home page. If this is turned off, the only places where a user can change the language setting is in their user profile or in the course settings if they are a teacher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Languages on the language menu===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to limit the number of languages students and teachers can select from, enter a reduced list here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Language selection priority===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This figure shows Moodle priority when selecting languages:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:mdl_lang_selection_priority.png|640px|Moodle language selection priority]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sitewide locale===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It&#039;s generally best to leave this setting empty, as it&#039;s set through each language pack.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Excel encoding===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave as default (Unicode) unless you have a particular reason for wanting Latin encoding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/0v72GKn2Wuk Moodle 2 Language Administration settings]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Réglages langue]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Spracheinstellungen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones del idioma]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Label_module_settings&amp;diff=107868</id>
		<title>Label module settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Label_module_settings&amp;diff=107868"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T00:36:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Label}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding a label==&lt;br /&gt;
*With the editing turned on to a course by choosing Label from the &amp;quot;Add an activity or resource&amp;quot; link (or, if not present, the &amp;quot;Add a resource&amp;quot; drop down menu) in the section where you want to add your menu. Click &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; top right to see all the settings expanded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:labelcollapsed.png|thumb|Collapsed view of editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:labelexpanded.png|thumb|Click to display the editing tools and drag the bottom right to enlarge the editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Type your chosen words or add your resources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Note: Because the label has the [[HTML_editor| TinyMCE text editor]], it is possible not just to type words but also to add images, links, media or code from within the labels&#039; editor. See [[Using_Label| here]] for suggestions about using labels in your course.&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
*Leave Common Module settings as &amp;quot;show&amp;quot; for the label to be visible.&lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access/Activity completion==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These settings are visible if [[Conditional activities]] and [[Activity completion]] have been enabled in the site and the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &amp;quot;Save and return to course&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*You can now use the move icon (crosshair or up/down arrow) to move your label to where you wish it to display.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:newlabel25.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Label capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/label:addinstance|Add a new label]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/kdPVi-cwMdg Adding a Label and content in Moodle]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Textfeld konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones de módulo etiqueta]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Grade_settings&amp;diff=107867</id>
		<title>Grade settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Grade_settings&amp;diff=107867"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T00:32:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Grades}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Course grade settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Course grade settings.png|thumb|Course grade settings]]Course grade settings determine how the gradebook appears for all participants in the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Course grade settings are found in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Grade administration &amp;gt; Course grade settings&#039;&#039; or via the gradebook Settings tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default course grade settings are set by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Grades&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grader report preferences==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Grader report preferences.png|thumb|Grader report preferences]]Teachers can set their preferences for the grader report via the gradebook &#039;My preferences&#039; tab. These settings will apply to all courses for that teacher. The teacher may change them at any time. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default grader report preferences are set by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Grades &amp;gt; Report settings &amp;gt; Grader report&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Moodle 2.4.2 onwards, the default number of students per page (&#039;&#039;grade_report_studentsperpage&#039;&#039;) can safely be increased without any loss of data when grading large numbers of students with many assignments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default values for all grade settings can be set by an administrator. The easiest way to do so is to log in as admin then browse a course gradebook and follow the &#039;Change defaults&#039; links.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following additional grade settings can be found in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Grades &amp;gt; General settings&#039;&#039;. The settings will affect all gradebooks used by all teachers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Graded Roles===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Graded roles are the type of user that will appear in the gradebook. Most of the time &amp;quot;student&amp;quot; is the only one needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===User profile report===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default user profile report setting has just one option, &#039;User report&#039;, unless a custom user report has been added to the site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers can view the user reports for all or selected students in the course in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Grades administration &amp;gt; User report&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Include scales in aggregation===&lt;br /&gt;
Scales can be included as numbers in all aggregated grades across all gradebooks in all courses. Changing this setting will force all aggregated grades to be recalculated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this is checked (and it is by default) then all custom scales will have a corresponding value that is assigned based on the number of options in the scale (ie. three values will have values of 1,2,3) and this will be included in the grade aggregation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enable publishing===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Grade publishing settings.png|thumb|Grade publishing settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
Grade publishing is a way of importing and exporting grades via a URL without being logged in to Moodle. Grade publishing is intended for administrators only. Security implications should be thoroughly considered before allowing non-admin users to publish grades.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Grade publishing may be enabled by checking the gradepublishing box. If enabled, administrators are provided with [[Grade export|grade export]] publishing settings in each course gradebook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Recover grades default===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When [[Enrolled users|manually enrolling]] a student in a course, there is an option &#039;Recover user&#039;s old grades if possible&#039;, however this checkbox is easy to miss. Enabling &#039;Recover grades default&#039; results in &#039;Recover user&#039;s old grades if possible&#039; being ticked for every course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:enrol users enrolment options.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Unlimited grades===&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers can enter grades over 100% directly in the gradebook if the &#039;&#039;unlimitedgrades&#039;&#039; setting is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grade capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:edit|Edit grades]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:export|Export grades]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:hide|Hide/unhide grades or items]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:import|Import grades]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:lock|Lock grades or items]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:manage|Manage grade items]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:managegradingforms|Manage advanced grading methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:manageletters|Manage grade letters]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:manageoutcomes|Manage grade outcomes]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:unlock|Unlock grades or items]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:view|View own grades]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:viewall|View grades of other users]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:viewhidden|View hidden grades for owner]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/QWE0c_-NjHE Moodle 2 Grades Administration settings]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Bewertungseinstellungen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones de calificación]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Paramètres de notes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Gradebook&amp;diff=107866</id>
		<title>Gradebook</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Gradebook&amp;diff=107866"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T00:25:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Grades}}&lt;br /&gt;
All the grades for each student in a course can be found in the course gradebook, or &#039;Grader report&#039; in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Grades&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The grader report collects [[Grade_items|items]] that have been graded from the various parts of Moodle that are assessed, and allows you to view and change them as well as sort them out into [[Grade_categories|categories]] and calculate totals in various ways. When you add an assessed item in a Moodle course, the gradebook automatically creates space for the grades it will produce and also adds the grades themselves as they are generated, either by the system or by you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The grades displayed are initially displayed as the raw marks from the assessments themselves, so will depend on how you set those up e.g. an essay out of 36 will appear as however many raw marks that student got, not a percentage (although this can be changed later, see below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that various default options for the gradebook are set at system level by the administrator and can be marked as being overridable by you, or fixed. This means that the options will not always be set up the same way for every user when they see the grader report for the first time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Display==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Along the top of the grader report are several rows: first the course, then the category, then the columns for each graded activity (for example: Assignment, Quiz, Lesson). Any activities settings which were left &amp;quot;uncategorised&amp;quot; will appear in the general category which is named after the course by default (any category name can be changed).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add a row showing the range of possible scores by selecting &#039;Show ranges&#039; in &#039;My report preferences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three ways that the categories can be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Grades only - without the category totals column&lt;br /&gt;
* Collapsed - Category total column only&lt;br /&gt;
* Full view - grades and the aggregates (the totals column for the category) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each section has a small icon immediately to the right of its name. Clicking this will cycle through these display modes for that category. + goes to grades only view, o goes to full view and - goes to collapsed view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Grades grader report with categories 1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Highlighting rows and columns===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When your gradebook starts to grow, it can be hard to keep track of which student and which assignment a cell refers to. Highlighting solves that.&lt;br /&gt;
* Clicking on empty space in the cell that contains the students name will toggle the highlighting of that entire row&lt;br /&gt;
* Clicking on empty space in the cell at the top of each column will toggle highlighting of the entire column&lt;br /&gt;
(Note: this requires Javascript to be enabled in your browser.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Sorting by columns===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can sort by any column.  Click the [[Image:Move.gif]] symbol near the top of a column to sort by that column.  This will change the symbol to a single down arrow.  Clicking again will sort lowest-to-highest, changing the symbol to an up arrow.  The arrows will toggle between these two states until you click on a different column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The student name columns do not have the [[Image:Move.gif]] symbol. Clicking on either the first or last name will cause the report to sort.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;width:75%; border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:Grade Report unsorted column1.png|frame|center|Unsorted]]&lt;br /&gt;
||[[Image:Grade Report sorted column2.png|frame|center|Sorted]]&lt;br /&gt;
||[[Image:Grade Report unsorted name1.png|frame|center|Unsorted]]&lt;br /&gt;
||[[Image:Grade Report sorted lastname3.png|frame|center|Sorted ]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Highlighting scores that are either adequate or unacceptable in red and green===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Turn editing on and click on the edit icon in the controls cell at the top of the column. You can then (maybe need to click &#039;show advanced&#039;) see the option to enter a &#039;grade to pass&#039;. Once set, any grades falling above this will be highlighted in green and any below will be highlighted in red.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the highlighting will not show if the Grader report is viewed in the editing mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Horizontal scrollbar===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A horizontal scrollbar enables teachers to scroll grades in the grader report. (Note that this feature is not available for IE6 users or for users who have have the screenreader setting in their profile set to Yes.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Gradebook horizontal scrollbar.png|thumb|Horizontal scrollbar]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mouse-over tooltips===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each grade cell in the table has a tooltip indicating the user and grade item to which the grade belongs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Filtering the gradebook by groups===&lt;br /&gt;
If you change the course settings Group mode to Visible groups or Separate groups a drop-down menu will appear in the gradebook to allow you to filter your students by groups.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Editing anything in the gradebook refers to editing the grades &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; and none of the available operations bear any relationship to editing the main course page i.e. the appearance of your course page cannot be influenced by anything you do in the gradebook. The &amp;quot;Turn editing on&amp;quot; button functions separately from the main course one, so editing can be on in the gradebook, but simultaneously off when you switch back to course view. This is because editing grades and editing the course page are separate capabilities.   Roles such as &#039;non-editing teacher&#039; may only have one or the other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Altering the grades===&lt;br /&gt;
You can click &amp;quot;Turn editing on&amp;quot;  at the top right to show an edit icon next to each grade. Clicking on the icon will bring up the editing screen for that grade which will allow you to set the grade, its written feedback and a number of other attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, you can choose &amp;quot;Quick grading&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Quick feedback&amp;quot; in &#039;My preferences&#039; to make the report appear with editable boxes containing each grade, so you can change many at once.  This capability can be a real time saver, but make sure to save at reasonable intervals lest a pageful of changes be lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you make changes here, they are then shown highlighted to indicate grades which have been manually changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Hiding columns or individual grades===&lt;br /&gt;
Turning on editing then clicking the &amp;quot;Show show/hide icons&amp;quot; link will give you the familiar show/hide eye icon next to each grade and at the top of each column. For more information, read about [[Grade_hiding|grade hiding]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Recalculating===&lt;br /&gt;
If you change any part of an assessment e.g. alter the maximum grade for one of the questions in a quiz, you may find that the columns do not yet reflect the change you have made. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Turn editing on&#039;&#039;&#039; twice to force the gradebook to re-check.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Gradebook capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is just one gradebook capability, [[Capabilities/gradereport/grader:view|View the grader report]], which is allowed for the default roles of manager, teacher and non-editing teacher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Extending the gradebook==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Gradebook can be extended in three main ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===1. [https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&amp;amp;id=9 Grade reports]===&lt;br /&gt;
Which are the main way to view and manipulate grades&lt;br /&gt;
* [[LAEGrader report|LAE Grader Report]] Alternative to Grader report that scrolls vertically and horizontally without losing student columns or grade item header rows. Lot of additional enhancements.&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=gradereport_updfgrades Upload PDF Grader Report] lets you view assignment grades, comments and lateness in a report&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2. Grade import plugins===&lt;br /&gt;
Which allow data to be imported from external sources&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3. [https://moodle.org/plugins/browse.php?list=category&amp;amp;id=10 Grade export plugins]:===&lt;br /&gt;
Which allow you to export grade data for other systems&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=gradeexport_pdf PDF document] This is moodle plugin for exporting grades in PDF format. It is developed by using &amp;quot;Moodle PDF library&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=gradeexport_checklist Checklist] This is a grade export plugin which will create an Excel spreadsheet containing all the checkmarks from a single checklist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Join the discussions about gradebook plugins in the [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=2122 Gradebook forum].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5hrLNbifiGQ Video explaining the different gradebook reports]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/5FbOti83Nkw Moodle 2.x Gradebook (part 1)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/Dg-10yQBXuM Moodle 2.x Gradebook (part 2)]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Bewertungen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Informe calificador]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Carnet de notes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:評定表]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Glossary_settings&amp;diff=107865</id>
		<title>Glossary settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Glossary_settings&amp;diff=107865"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T00:20:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Glossary}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding a glossary==&lt;br /&gt;
To add a glossary:&lt;br /&gt;
#With the editing turned on, in the section you wish to add your glossary, click the &amp;quot;Add an activity or resource&amp;quot; link (or, if not present, the &amp;quot;Add an activity&amp;quot; drop down menu ) and choose &#039;&#039;Glossary.&#039;&#039; All settings may expanded by clicking the &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; link top right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:glossarygeneral25.png|thumb|General settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
===Name===&lt;br /&gt;
Give your new glossary a descriptive name. &lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
Describe the purpose of the glossary and provide instructions or background information, links etc. Click &amp;quot;Show editing tools&amp;quot; to display the rich text editor, and drag the bottom right of the text box out to expand it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Display description on course page===&lt;br /&gt;
If this box is ticked, the description will appear on the course page just below the name of the glossary.&lt;br /&gt;
===Is this glossary global?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Administrators can make a global glossary, with entries linking throughout the whole Moodle site. Any course may contain a global glossary, though the best practice is to place a global glossary on the site front page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Glossary type===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can decide whether the glossary will be main or secondary. The glossary system allows you to export entries from any secondary glossary to the main one of the course. In order to do this, you should specify which glossary is the main one. You can only have one main glossary per course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Entries==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:glossaryentries25.png|thumb|Entries settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Approved by default===&lt;br /&gt;
If set to &amp;quot;yes&amp;quot; then new entries appear automatically. If not, then the teacher must approve each one first.&lt;br /&gt;
===Always allow editing===&lt;br /&gt;
If set to &amp;quot;yes&amp;quot;, students can edit their entries at any time. If not, then they can only edit for a certain period (defined in [[Site Policies]])&lt;br /&gt;
===Duplicate entries allowed===&lt;br /&gt;
This allows the entry of more than one definition for a given word.&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow comments on entries===&lt;br /&gt;
Students and teachers can leave comments on glossary definitions. The comments are available through a link at the bottom of the definition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Automatically link glossary entries===&lt;br /&gt;
If the [[Glossary auto-linking filter]] is enabled by an administrator (see [[Filters]] for further details), then turning this on allows individual entries in this glossary to be automatically linked whenever the concept words and phrases appear throughout the rest of the same course. This includes forum postings, internal resources, week summaries and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:Glossaryautolink.png|thumb|An auto-linked word in a forum]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Enabling linking for the glossary does not automatically turn on linking for each entry - linking needs to be set for each entry individually. If you do not want particular text to be linked (in a forum posting, say) then you should add &amp;lt;nolink&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;/nolink&amp;gt; tags around the text. Note that category names are also linked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Appearance==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:glossaryappearance25.png|thumb|Appearance settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Display format===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That specifies the way that each entry will be shown within the glossary. The default formats are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Simple, dictionary style - This looks like a conventional dictionary with separate entries. No authors are displayed and attachments are shown as links. &lt;br /&gt;
* Continuous without author - Like the simple style. Shows the entries one after other without any kind of separation but the editing icons if your theme supports it. &lt;br /&gt;
* Full with author - A forum-like display format showing author&#039;s data. Attachments are shown as links. &lt;br /&gt;
* Full without author - A forum-like display format that does not show author&#039;s data. Attachments are shown as links. &lt;br /&gt;
* Encyclopedia - Like &#039;Full with author&#039; but attached images are shown inline.&lt;br /&gt;
* Entry list - This lists the concepts as links.&lt;br /&gt;
* FAQ  - Useful for displaying lists of frequently asked questions. It automatically appends the words QUESTION and ANSWER in the concept and definition respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Glossary FAQ]] for more information on the code for the different display formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Approval display format===&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to set an alternative display format for when entries are approved that can differ from the display format on the course page. This could be useful for instance if a tutor wants to see who made a particular glossary entry before approving it but doesn&#039;t want the students&#039; name to be displayed for others on the course page.&lt;br /&gt;
===Entries shown per page===&lt;br /&gt;
Decid here how many entries to show per page.&lt;br /&gt;
===Show alphabet links===&lt;br /&gt;
If set to &amp;quot;yes&amp;quot;, users can browse the glossary by letters of the alphabet.&lt;br /&gt;
===Show &#039;ALL&#039; link===&lt;br /&gt;
If set to &amp;quot;yes&amp;quot;, users can browse all the entries at once&lt;br /&gt;
===Show &#039;Special&#039; link===&lt;br /&gt;
If set to &amp;quot;yes&amp;quot;, users can can browse the glossary by special characters, such as @ and #.&lt;br /&gt;
===Allow print view===&lt;br /&gt;
This provides a printer-friendly version link for students. (Teachers are always provided with a printer-friendly version link.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==RSS==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default and only visible if RSS has been enabled on the site and for the glossary.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:glossaryrss25.png|thumb|RSS settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===RSS feed for this activity===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This turns RSS on or off. When set to “None,” the RSS feed is disabled. When set to “Concepts with authors,” the RSS feed will send out the glossary entries with the name of the author. When set to “Concepts without authors,” the RSS feed sends out glossary entries without the name of the author. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Number of RSS recent articles===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This number sets the number of entries that go out via RSS. If this number is set to 5, then the 5 most recent articles will be sent to subscribers. As new entries get added, the oldest entry gets replaced on the RSS feed. If your glossary gets a lot of posts every day, you will want to set this number high. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When RSS is enabled for your glossary, an orange RSS button appears on the main page (in the upper right-hand side). When a user clicks on the RSS button, they see the [[XML]] code displayed, needed by the news-reader. Once a user has the RSS news-feed link, adding it to a reader is simple and will then display Glossary aggregated information, along with other information they subscribe to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grade==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the category in which this glossary will appear if ratings are enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ratings==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:ratings25.png|thumb|Ratings settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Roles with permissions to rate===&lt;br /&gt;
Glossary entries can be rated using a [[Scales|scale]]. By default, only teachers can rate glossary entries, though students can be given permission to do so if desired from &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Glossary administration&#039;&#039;. This is a useful tool for giving students participation grades. Any ratings given are recorded in the [[Gradebook|gradebook]].&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access/Activity completion==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Restrict access and Activity completion settings are visible if [[Conditional activities]] and [[Activity completion]] have been enabled in the site and the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding a new glossary entry==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Using Glossary]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Glossary permissions==&lt;br /&gt;
Role permissions for the activity can be changed in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Glossary administration &amp;gt; Permissions.&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The glossary module has additional settings which may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Glossary&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Glossary level default settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* glossary_entbypage - Number of Glossary entries shown per page. Default is set to 10.&lt;br /&gt;
* glossary_dupentries - Whether or not the Glossary will allow duplicate entries. Default is set to &amp;quot;No&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* glossary_allowcomments - Whether or not the Glossary will accept user comments on its entries. Default is set to &amp;quot;No&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* glossary_linkbydefault - Whether or not a glossary should be automatically linked. Default is set to &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* glossary_defaultapproval - Whether or not the Glossary will define the approval status of an entry posted by a student. Default is set to &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* glossary_enablerssfeeds - Enabling of RSS feeds for all glossaries. Default is set to &amp;quot;No&amp;quot;. Note: feeds will still need to be turned on manually in the settings for each glossary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Entry level default settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* glossary_linkentries - Whether or not glossary entries should be automatically linked. Default is set to &amp;quot;No&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
* glossary_casesensitive - Whether or not an entry is case sensitive when linked. Default is set to &amp;quot;No&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* glossary_fullmatch - Whether or not an entry should match the case in the target text by default when linked. Default is set to &amp;quot;No&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Display Formats Setup === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To hide or show any of these entries, simply click on the &amp;quot;eye&amp;quot; icon next to the entry. Clicking on the &amp;quot;writing hand&amp;quot; icon will take you to the settings page for that entry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/y82WI5DJzkE Moodle 2 Glossary]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Glossar konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:用語集エントリを追加/編集する]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Front_page_settings&amp;diff=107864</id>
		<title>Front page settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Front_page_settings&amp;diff=107864"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T00:17:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Front page}}The site&#039;s [[Front page]] is similar to a course page. The front page settings, roles, filters, backup, restore and questions are currently duplicated in &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt; Front page settings&#039;&#039; AND &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Front page&#039;&#039; (reported as MDL-26012).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front page settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following settings may be changed by a site administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Front page settings &amp;gt; Edit settings&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Full site name===&lt;br /&gt;
This name appears at the top of every page above the navigation bar.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:demositefrontpage01.png|frame|center|Front page full site name]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Short name for site===&lt;br /&gt;
The short name appears at the beginning of the navigation bar as a link back to your site front page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Front page summary===&lt;br /&gt;
This summary can be displayed on the front page using the course/site summary block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Front page and Front page items when logged in===&lt;br /&gt;
The centre of the front page can display any combination of the following: news items, a list of courses, a list of enrolled courses, a list of course categories, a list of categories and courses, a course search box or none.  The order is determined by a combination box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to create one setting for anyone who gets to the front page without logging in to the Moodle site, and another look for only those who have logged into the Moodle site.  There are two combination boxes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!colspan=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;|Combination boxes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:FrontPage settings frontpage pd.png|thumb|left|frontpage showing pulldown]]&lt;br /&gt;
| The image on the left shows the first Front Page settings dialog - what visitors will see before they log in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The image on the right shows a second front Page settings dialog - what Authenticated Users will see when logged in. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:An alternative option for logged-in users is [[My home]] (can be set in Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Navigation)&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:FrontPage_settings_frontpageloggedin.png|thumb|right|frontpage for login user box]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum category depth===&lt;br /&gt;
This specifies the maximum depth of child categories expanded when displaying categories or combo list. Deeper level categories will appear as links and user can expand them with AJAX request.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum number of courses===&lt;br /&gt;
Maximum number of courses to be displayed on the site&#039;s front page in course listings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Include a topic section===&lt;br /&gt;
This adds a topic section to the centre-top of the front page. When editing is turned on, resources and/or activities can be added to the topic section using the dropdown menus, in the same way as on a course page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Note: The label resource can be used to add text and/or an image to the centre-top of the front page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===News items to show===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting only applies if the front page is set to display news items or if you are using the [[Latest News block]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Comments per page===&lt;br /&gt;
Each course may include a [[Comments block]] which allows the display of user comments. The number of comments displayed at any time is set here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default front page role===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default frontpage role enables logged-in users to participate in front page activities. It is recommended that it is set to frontpage role. It should &#039;&#039;never&#039;&#039; be set to [[Guest]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For sites which do not have a default frontpage role (because they upgraded from 1.9), it is recommended that the administrator [[Creating custom roles|creates a new role]] with frontpage archetype, resets it to default and then sets it as the default frontpage role.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front Page roles==&lt;br /&gt;
As in a course, you can assign users [[Roles|roles]] just in the [[Context|context]] of this page.  Note this is different from the default Authenticated User on Front Page role found in front page settings. As a security issue, usually only admins can modify the front page, other users do not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to upload users as students in the front page with a csv file using the site short name as &#039;course1&#039; field, student in &#039;role1&#039; field (and, if needed, chosen group name in &#039;group1&#039; field.) &#039;&#039;&#039;(new in 2.5)&#039;&#039;&#039;{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front Page backup==&lt;br /&gt;
You can backup the front page, similar to a [[Course backup]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front Page restore==&lt;br /&gt;
As in a course, you can [[Restore]] a backed up version of the front page.&lt;br /&gt;
However, there are currently issues with front page restore, as outlined in MDL-31500 and MDL-30808&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Front Page questions==&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Question bank]] is accessible from the Front Page. For example, if &amp;quot;topic&amp;quot; is checked in the front page settings, you can add a [[Quiz module]] activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tips and Tricks==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Moodle site&#039;s front page can be reconfigured from the default standard to give it a different look and or change how it functions.  Depending upon the changes, this can be a simple or a more complex process. Of course a custom theme may have it&#039;s own unique front page format.   Here are some examples using the formal white standard theme:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Visual examples====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery caption=&amp;quot;Guest view, same Theme- click on any to enlarge&amp;quot; widths=&amp;quot;150px&amp;quot; heights=&amp;quot;100px&amp;quot; perrow=&amp;quot;3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:fp013col.png|3 column Front Page, topic checked&lt;br /&gt;
Image:fp032colright.png|2 column Front Page, blocks right &lt;br /&gt;
Image:fp022colleft.png|2 column Front Page,  blocks left&lt;br /&gt;
Image:fp043coluser.png|3 column Front Page, Categories and courses&lt;br /&gt;
Image:fp052colright.png|2 column Front Page, Categories only&lt;br /&gt;
Image:fp021col.png|Clean look, topic checked, no blocks&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Central area, Courses or Categories?====&lt;br /&gt;
This is a major decision, what is it you want in the centre of your front page? You can have a list of categories, a list of categories and courses, or neither, a label with a table full of images works just as well. The issue is always the same, actually, what looks good.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Clean look, topic checked, no blocks====&lt;br /&gt;
The standard Moodle page format of [[Block]]s on the left and blocks on the right is not always appropriate or considered pretty. The [[Administrator|site administrator]] can change this basic format by simply deleting or hiding blocks that can be seen by users. Navigation can be placed on the dock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The two column format====&lt;br /&gt;
The Administrator decides which blocks should appear on the front page and moves all of them to the left or right side. This format allows you to decide what you want in the centre, and where you want the blocks, left or right.  &lt;br /&gt;
:Tip: It is possible to force a block column to assume a specific width.  For example, placing an image of 400 px in a block will force that column to 400 px.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====The clean look example====&lt;br /&gt;
Some sites want an uncluttered look. A site administrator or designer wants to start with the most basic look and then add features.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The site administrator will turn on editing and hide or delete all blocks that can be see by teachers or students on the front page.&lt;br /&gt;
# Then go to the Site administration block► Front Page ► Front Page settings and:&lt;br /&gt;
## Set the &amp;quot;Front page&amp;quot; list to None, None, None, None &lt;br /&gt;
## Set &amp;quot;Front page items when logged in&amp;quot; list to the same &lt;br /&gt;
## Check the box for &amp;quot;Include Topic section&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
## Save &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the above was done with 1 theme, and a simple front page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Block settings==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Editconfigblock.png|thumb|200px|right|Editing block settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
Each block has a number of configuration settings that you can change. See [[Managing blocks]] for more details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Front Page FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/XkVp4Vo0juA Moodle 2 Administration Front page settings]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Einstellungen_f%C3%BCr_die_Startseite]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones de la portada]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Hasiera-orriaren_ezarpenak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Réglages page d&#039;accueil]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[pl:Ustawienia strony głównej]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Folder_resource_settings&amp;diff=107863</id>
		<title>Folder resource settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Folder_resource_settings&amp;diff=107863"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T00:08:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Folder}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding a folder to your course==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Folders you wish to upload to Moodle have to be &amp;quot;zipped&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;compressed&amp;quot; first. The way you do this depends on your computer and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have a folder of files you would like to display, there are two methods:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Quick method====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &#039;Turn editing on&#039; button at the top right of the course page&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag and drop the folder onto the course section where you&#039;d like it to appear&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the button of the action you would like to take with the folder (in our case, &amp;quot;Unzip&amp;quot;) and click &amp;quot;Upload&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#If necessary, edit the title of the folder by clicking the pencil icon&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:folderdragging.png|thumb|2. Drag and drop folder]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:folderaction.png|thumb|3. Uploading the folder]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Longer method====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &#039;Turn editing on&#039; button at the top right of the course page&lt;br /&gt;
#Click &#039;Add an activity or resource&#039; link, then in the activity chooser; select folder then click the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; button (or select folder from the &amp;quot;Add a resource&amp;quot; dropdown menu) All settings may expanded by clicking the &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; link top right.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:foldergeneral.png|thumb|General settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:foldercontent.png|thumb|Content settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#For&#039;&#039;&#039; General&#039;&#039;&#039;, add  name and a description (which may be required or optional according to the admin settings)Click &amp;quot;Show editing tools&amp;quot; to display the rich text editor and drag the bottom right of the text box out to expand it. Enabling &#039;Display description on course page&#039; will show it just below the link to the folder.&lt;br /&gt;
# For &#039;&#039;&#039;Content,&#039;&#039;&#039; either drag and drop a zipped/compressed folder into the box with an arrow or click the Add button to open the [[File picker]] menu in order to choose a file from your computer or a repository.&lt;br /&gt;
#When the folder thumbnail appears, click on it and select &amp;quot;Unzip&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:newfolderupload.png|thumb|Unzipping a folder]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the original (zipped) folder and click the &amp;quot;Delete&amp;quot; button to delete it if you wish&lt;br /&gt;
#Select how you want to [[#Display folder contents |display your folder contents]], your [[Common module settings]] and, if enabled, [[Conditional activities settings]] and [[Activity completion]] and click &amp;quot;Save and return to course&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the button &#039;Save and return to course&#039; at the bottom of the page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating and uploading to a new folder==&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method if  you want to create a folder on your Moodle course and then upload files into it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Turn editing on&#039; button at the top right of the course page&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;Add an activity or resource&#039; link, then in the activity chooser; select folder then click the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; button (or select folder from the &amp;quot;Add a resource&amp;quot; dropdown menu)&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter a name and a description (which may be required or optional according to the admin settings)&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;Create folder&amp;quot; link as below; choose a name for your new folder and then click &amp;quot;Create folder&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click INTO the folder&lt;br /&gt;
# You can then add individual files into the folder either by dragging and dropping into the box (1 below) or clicking the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; (2 below) to upload files from  the [[File picker]] &lt;br /&gt;
# Choose how you want to display your folder contents, your [[Common module settings]] and, if enabled, [[Conditional activities settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &amp;quot;Save and return to course&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:createfolder.png|thumb|4. Creating a folder]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:addtofolder.png|thumb|6. Adding files to a folder]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Display folder contents==&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
Decide here whether to have the folder displayed on a separate page (the default) or inline with or without subfolders expanded or collapsed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:folder1.png|thumb|Folder displayed on separate page]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:folder2.png|thumb|Folder displayed inline]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:folder3.png|thumb|Folder displayed inline with subfolders expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Moodle 2.5.2 onwards, all folder names are shown on the course page. (Previously the name was not displayed for folders displayed inline.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Folder capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/mod/folder:view|View folder content]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/mod/folder:managefiles|Manage files in folder module]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/mod/folder:addinstance|Add new folder]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The folder module has additional settings which may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Folder&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require activity description===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows you to turn off the requirement for users to type something into the description box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/VQ14drMhRyE Moodle 2.0 Adding Content - Folder]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/ZPaVskLCRb4 Moodle 2 file management]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Verzeichnis konfigurieren]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Folder_resource_settings&amp;diff=107862</id>
		<title>Folder resource settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Folder_resource_settings&amp;diff=107862"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T00:06:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Folder}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding a folder to your course==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Folders you wish to upload to Moodle have to be &amp;quot;zipped&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;compressed&amp;quot; first. The way you do this depends on your computer and operating system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have a folder of files you would like to display, there are two methods:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Quick method====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &#039;Turn editing on&#039; button at the top right of the course page&lt;br /&gt;
#Drag and drop the folder onto the course section where you&#039;d like it to appear&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the button of the action you would like to take with the folder (in our case, &amp;quot;Unzip&amp;quot;) and click &amp;quot;Upload&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#If necessary, edit the title of the folder by clicking the pencil icon&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:folderdragging.png|thumb|2. Drag and drop folder]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:folderaction.png|thumb|3. Uploading the folder]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Longer method====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &#039;Turn editing on&#039; button at the top right of the course page&lt;br /&gt;
#Click &#039;Add an activity or resource&#039; link, then in the activity chooser; select folder then click the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; button (or select folder from the &amp;quot;Add a resource&amp;quot; dropdown menu) All settings may expanded by clicking the &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; link top right.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:foldergeneral.png|thumb|General settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:foldercontent.png|thumb|Content settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#For&#039;&#039;&#039; General&#039;&#039;&#039;, add  name and a description (which may be required or optional according to the admin settings)Click &amp;quot;Show editing tools&amp;quot; to display the rich text editor and drag the bottom right of the text box out to expand it. Enabling &#039;Display description on course page&#039; will show it just below the link to the folder.&lt;br /&gt;
# For &#039;&#039;&#039;Content,&#039;&#039;&#039; either drag and drop a zipped/compressed folder into the box with an arrow or click the Add button to open the [[File picker]] menu in order to choose a file from your computer or a repository.&lt;br /&gt;
#When the folder thumbnail appears, click on it and select &amp;quot;Unzip&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:newfolderupload.png|thumb|Unzipping a folder]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the original (zipped) folder and click the &amp;quot;Delete&amp;quot; button to delete it if you wish&lt;br /&gt;
#Select how you want to [[#Display folder contents |display your folder contents]], your [[Common module settings]] and, if enabled, [[Conditional activities settings]] and [[Activity completion]] and click &amp;quot;Save and return to course&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the button &#039;Save and return to course&#039; at the bottom of the page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating and uploading to a new folder==&lt;br /&gt;
Use this method if  you want to create a folder on your Moodle course and then upload files into it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Turn editing on&#039; button at the top right of the course page&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;Add an activity or resource&#039; link, then in the activity chooser; select folder then click the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; button (or select folder from the &amp;quot;Add a resource&amp;quot; dropdown menu)&lt;br /&gt;
# Enter a name and a description (which may be required or optional according to the admin settings)&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;Create folder&amp;quot; link as below; choose a name for your new folder and then click &amp;quot;Create folder&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click INTO the folder&lt;br /&gt;
# You can then add individual files into the folder either by dragging and dropping into the box (1 below) or clicking the &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; (2 below) to upload files from  the [[File picker]] &lt;br /&gt;
# Choose how you want to display your folder contents, your [[Common module settings]] and, if enabled, [[Conditional activities settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &amp;quot;Save and return to course&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:createfolder.png|thumb|4. Creating a folder]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:addtofolder.png|thumb|6. Adding files to a folder]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Display folder contents==&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
Decide here whether to have the folder displayed on a separate page (the default) or inline with or without subfolders expanded or collapsed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:folder1.png|thumb|Folder displayed on separate page]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:folder2.png|thumb|Folder displayed inline]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:folder3.png|thumb|Folder displayed inline with subfolders expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Moodle 2.5.2 onwards, all folder names are shown on the course page. (Previously the name was not displayed for folders displayed inline.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Folder capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/mod/folder:view|View folder content]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/mod/folder:managefiles|Manage files in folder module]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/mod/folder:addinstance|Add new folder]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The folder module has additional settings which may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Folder&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require activity description===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows you to turn off the requirement for users to type something into the description box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/ZPaVskLCRb4 Moodle 2 file management]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Verzeichnis konfigurieren]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File_resource_settings&amp;diff=107861</id>
		<title>File resource settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File_resource_settings&amp;diff=107861"/>
		<updated>2014-06-05T00:03:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{File}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding a file==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a file to your course&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:dragandrop.png|thumb|Quick method of adding a file]]&lt;br /&gt;
Quick method: (&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039; - &#039;&#039;does not work with Internet Explorer 9 or lower&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Turn editing on&#039; button at the top right of the course page&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag and drop the file onto the course section where you&#039;d like it to appear&lt;br /&gt;
# If necessary, edit the title of the file by clicking the pencil icon, or edit other options (see below) by clicking the editing icon&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Longer method:&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Turn editing on&#039; button at the top right of the course page&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;Add an activity or resource&#039; link, then in the activity chooser, select file then click the Add button (or select file from the &amp;quot;Add a resource&amp;quot; dropdown menu) All settings may expanded by clicking the &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; link top right.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select your options as below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:filegeneral25.png|thumb|General settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Name===&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever you type here will form the link learners click on to view the file so it is helpful to give it a name that suggests its purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
Add a description of your file here if desired (or required.) Click &amp;quot;Show editing tools&amp;quot; to display the rich text editor, and drag the bottom right of the text box out to expand it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Display description on the course page===&lt;br /&gt;
If this box is ticked, the description will appear on the course page just below the name of the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Content==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:filecontent25.png|thumb|Content settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Either drag and drop your file onto the arrow if you are using an appropriate browser, or click on &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; and use the [[File picker]] to upload your file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(Note that if legacy files were used there will be a setting &amp;quot;Migration of old course file&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Appearance==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:fileappearance25.png|thumb|Appearance settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Display===&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Automatic&#039;&#039; - Make the best guess at what should happen (probably what is wanted 99% of the time).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Embed&#039;&#039; - Show the Moodle page with heading, blocks and footer. Show the title/description of the item and display the file directly in the page as well (good for images, flash animations, videos?, PDFs).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Force download&#039;&#039; - user clicks on the file, then the web browser pops up with the &#039;where do you want to save this file&#039; box.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Open&#039;&#039; - No Moodle heading, blocks, footer or description - just show the file in the web browser (e.g. shows image, PDF, flash animation, taking up the whole browser window)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;In pop-up&#039;&#039; - Same as &#039;Open&#039;, but opens a new browser window to show this file (without the Moodle heading, blocks, etc) - this browser window also does not have all the menus and address bar in it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The following additional options are only there if you enable them via &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; File&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;In frame&#039;&#039; - show the Moodle heading and the file description, with the file displayed in a resizable area below (images, PDF, flash, etc. supported).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;New window&#039;&#039; - very much like &#039;in pop-up&#039;, but the new window is a full browser window, with menus and address bar, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All of the above is true of items that can be displayed inside the browser directly (e.g. images, text files, PDFs (with plugin)). If the file cannot be displayed within the browser (e.g. word documents, without a suitable plugin, or other files that need to be loaded by an external program), then the pop-ups or frames, etc. will be created, but then the browser will take over and ask if you want to save the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To summarise:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Do you want Moodle to sort it all out for you? - Automatic&lt;br /&gt;
* Do you want to force the user to save the file (or open it in a program on their desktop)? - Force download&lt;br /&gt;
* Do you want to show the file as part of the Moodle page (images, PDFs, videos)? - Embed&lt;br /&gt;
* Do you want to show the file in the browser, but without the Moodle page decorations (images, PDFs, videos)? - Open&lt;br /&gt;
* Do you want that, but in a new window? - In Pop-up (or possibly &#039;New window&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
* Do you want to use a horrible bit of non-strict HTML that should never be allowed in polite company? - In frame&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Show size.type===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To show the file size and/or type on the course page and also on the resource page, simply tick the appropriate checkboxes.&lt;br /&gt;
====Display resource name/description====&lt;br /&gt;
To show the resource name and/or description when clicking to access the file, simply tick the appropriate checkboxes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pop-up width/height===&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is visible when &amp;quot;Show more&amp;quot; is clicked.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your file is to be displayed in a pop-up, specify the width and height here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Use filters on file content===&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is visible when &amp;quot;Show more&amp;quot; is clicked.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish  included media such as images and mp3 to appear embedded in the files then select &amp;quot;all files&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;HTML files only&amp;quot;, according to your file types. (Note that this  setting may cause problems for some Flash and Java applets.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]] &lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access/Activity completion==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These settings are visible if [[Conditional activities]] and [[Activity completion]] have been enabled in the site and the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displaying a website index page==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Setmainfile.png|thumb|Setting the main file]]&lt;br /&gt;
The file module may be used if you have a folder with linked files such as a website with an index.html file or a flash activity with xml/swf and index file.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:file resource.png|thumb|Website index page set as main file]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Turn editing on&#039; button at the top right of the course page&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag and drop the zipped folder onto the course section where you&#039;d like it to appear, answer &#039;Create file resource&#039; to the popup dialogue, then click the upload button &lt;br /&gt;
# Clicking the editing icon (hand with a pen) then click on the zip file and unzip it&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the index.html file or the file you want to start displaying your linked files from then in the popup dialogue click the button &#039;Set main file&#039;. This ensures this file is the one that appears on the course page for students to click on. The main file is then indicated with a title in bold.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the button &#039;Save and display&#039; at the bottom of the page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==File module capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/resource:view|View file resource]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/resource:addinstance|Add a new file resource]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The file module has additional settings which may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; File&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Frame height===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can specify the height of the top frame (containing the navigation) if you choose the  &amp;quot;in frame&amp;quot; display option.  Note: If your theme has a large header then the &#039;&#039;resource_framesize&#039;&#039; variable should be increased to prevent horizontal and vertical scrollbars.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require activity description===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows you to turn off the requirement for users to type something into the description box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Available display options===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FileOptions.jpg|thumb|Setting the Admin File Display Options]]&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows you to add different ways the resource may be displayed on the course page.  By default Moodle doesn&#039;t enable &amp;quot;New window&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;In frame&amp;quot;, so you need to set them available here if required, and you can also disable other options if not applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default values for activity settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can set the defaults for this resource. You can also choose which setting(s) to class as &amp;quot;Advanced&amp;quot;. These settings will only then appear if the user clicks &amp;quot;Show More&amp;quot; in the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/a_HoneIa-rY Moodle 2.0 Adding Resources - File]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/ZPaVskLCRb4 Moodle 2 file management]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datei konfigurieren]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File_resource_settings&amp;diff=107860</id>
		<title>File resource settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File_resource_settings&amp;diff=107860"/>
		<updated>2014-06-04T23:56:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{File}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding a file==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a file to your course&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:dragandrop.png|thumb|Quick method of adding a file]]&lt;br /&gt;
Quick method: (&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039; - &#039;&#039;does not work with Internet Explorer 9 or lower&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Turn editing on&#039; button at the top right of the course page&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag and drop the file onto the course section where you&#039;d like it to appear&lt;br /&gt;
# If necessary, edit the title of the file by clicking the pencil icon, or edit other options (see below) by clicking the editing icon&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Longer method:&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Turn editing on&#039; button at the top right of the course page&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;Add an activity or resource&#039; link, then in the activity chooser, select file then click the Add button (or select file from the &amp;quot;Add a resource&amp;quot; dropdown menu) All settings may expanded by clicking the &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; link top right.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select your options as below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:filegeneral25.png|thumb|General settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Name===&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever you type here will form the link learners click on to view the file so it is helpful to give it a name that suggests its purpose.&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
Add a description of your file here if desired (or required.) Click &amp;quot;Show editing tools&amp;quot; to display the rich text editor, and drag the bottom right of the text box out to expand it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Display description on the course page===&lt;br /&gt;
If this box is ticked, the description will appear on the course page just below the name of the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Content==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:filecontent25.png|thumb|Content settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Either drag and drop your file onto the arrow if you are using an appropriate browser, or click on &amp;quot;Add&amp;quot; and use the [[File picker]] to upload your file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(Note that if legacy files were used there will be a setting &amp;quot;Migration of old course file&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Appearance==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:fileappearance25.png|thumb|Appearance settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Display===&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Automatic&#039;&#039; - Make the best guess at what should happen (probably what is wanted 99% of the time).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Embed&#039;&#039; - Show the Moodle page with heading, blocks and footer. Show the title/description of the item and display the file directly in the page as well (good for images, flash animations, videos?, PDFs).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Force download&#039;&#039; - user clicks on the file, then the web browser pops up with the &#039;where do you want to save this file&#039; box.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Open&#039;&#039; - No Moodle heading, blocks, footer or description - just show the file in the web browser (e.g. shows image, PDF, flash animation, taking up the whole browser window)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;In pop-up&#039;&#039; - Same as &#039;Open&#039;, but opens a new browser window to show this file (without the Moodle heading, blocks, etc) - this browser window also does not have all the menus and address bar in it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The following additional options are only there if you enable them via &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; File&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;In frame&#039;&#039; - show the Moodle heading and the file description, with the file displayed in a resizable area below (images, PDF, flash, etc. supported).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;New window&#039;&#039; - very much like &#039;in pop-up&#039;, but the new window is a full browser window, with menus and address bar, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All of the above is true of items that can be displayed inside the browser directly (e.g. images, text files, PDFs (with plugin)). If the file cannot be displayed within the browser (e.g. word documents, without a suitable plugin, or other files that need to be loaded by an external program), then the pop-ups or frames, etc. will be created, but then the browser will take over and ask if you want to save the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To summarise:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Do you want Moodle to sort it all out for you? - Automatic&lt;br /&gt;
* Do you want to force the user to save the file (or open it in a program on their desktop)? - Force download&lt;br /&gt;
* Do you want to show the file as part of the Moodle page (images, PDFs, videos)? - Embed&lt;br /&gt;
* Do you want to show the file in the browser, but without the Moodle page decorations (images, PDFs, videos)? - Open&lt;br /&gt;
* Do you want that, but in a new window? - In Pop-up (or possibly &#039;New window&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
* Do you want to use a horrible bit of non-strict HTML that should never be allowed in polite company? - In frame&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Show size.type===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To show the file size and/or type on the course page and also on the resource page, simply tick the appropriate checkboxes.&lt;br /&gt;
====Display resource name/description====&lt;br /&gt;
To show the resource name and/or description when clicking to access the file, simply tick the appropriate checkboxes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Pop-up width/height===&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is visible when &amp;quot;Show more&amp;quot; is clicked.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your file is to be displayed in a pop-up, specify the width and height here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Use filters on file content===&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is visible when &amp;quot;Show more&amp;quot; is clicked.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish  included media such as images and mp3 to appear embedded in the files then select &amp;quot;all files&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;HTML files only&amp;quot;, according to your file types. (Note that this  setting may cause problems for some Flash and Java applets.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]] &lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access/Activity completion==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These settings are visible if [[Conditional activities]] and [[Activity completion]] have been enabled in the site and the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Displaying a website index page==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Setmainfile.png|thumb|Setting the main file]]&lt;br /&gt;
The file module may be used if you have a folder with linked files such as a website with an index.html file or a flash activity with xml/swf and index file.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:file resource.png|thumb|Website index page set as main file]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Turn editing on&#039; button at the top right of the course page&lt;br /&gt;
# Drag and drop the zipped folder onto the course section where you&#039;d like it to appear, answer &#039;Create file resource&#039; to the popup dialogue, then click the upload button &lt;br /&gt;
# Clicking the editing icon (hand with a pen) then click on the zip file and unzip it&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the index.html file or the file you want to start displaying your linked files from then in the popup dialogue click the button &#039;Set main file&#039;. This ensures this file is the one that appears on the course page for students to click on. The main file is then indicated with a title in bold.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the button &#039;Save and display&#039; at the bottom of the page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==File module capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/resource:view|View file resource]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/resource:addinstance|Add a new file resource]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The file module has additional settings which may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; File&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Frame height===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can specify the height of the top frame (containing the navigation) if you choose the  &amp;quot;in frame&amp;quot; display option.  Note: If your theme has a large header then the &#039;&#039;resource_framesize&#039;&#039; variable should be increased to prevent horizontal and vertical scrollbars.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require activity description===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows you to turn off the requirement for users to type something into the description box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Available display options===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FileOptions.jpg|thumb|Setting the Admin File Display Options]]&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows you to add different ways the resource may be displayed on the course page.  By default Moodle doesn&#039;t enable &amp;quot;New window&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;In frame&amp;quot;, so you need to set them available here if required, and you can also disable other options if not applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default values for activity settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can set the defaults for this resource. You can also choose which setting(s) to class as &amp;quot;Advanced&amp;quot;. These settings will only then appear if the user clicks &amp;quot;Show More&amp;quot; in the settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/a_HoneIa-rY Moodle 2.0 Adding Resources - File]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datei konfigurieren]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Manual_enrolment&amp;diff=107859</id>
		<title>Manual enrolment</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Manual_enrolment&amp;diff=107859"/>
		<updated>2014-06-04T23:46:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Enrolment}}&lt;br /&gt;
The manual enrolments plugin allows users to be enrolled manually via a link in the course administration settings. The plugin has to be enabled by the site administrator (see [[Enrolment plugins]]) and should normally be enabled as certain other enrolment plugins, such as self enrolment, require it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Course settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Checking you have manual enrolment in your course===&lt;br /&gt;
*In a course, go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Enrolment methods&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure Manual enrolments has its &amp;quot;eye&amp;quot; opened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Manualenrolments.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Editing manual enrolment settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Managers (and any other users with the capability [[Capabilities/enrol/manual:config|enrol/manual:config]]) can edit the manual enrolment method in the course and set the default enrolment period and default role in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Enrolment methods&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:enrolmenexpirynotification.png|thumb|The manual enrolment screen (Click to enlarge)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible also for students and/or teachers to be notified when enrolments expire by selecting either &amp;quot;Enroller only&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Enroller and enrolled user&amp;quot; from the dropdown &amp;quot;Notify before enrolment expires&amp;quot; and a time in &amp;quot;Notification threshold&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enrolling users==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Method 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Enrolledusers.png|thumb|Enrolling users method 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Enrolled users&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Enrol users&#039; button at the top right or bottom left of the page&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the &#039;Assign roles&#039; dropdown if you wish to change the role&lt;br /&gt;
# Select enrolment options as appropriate&lt;br /&gt;
# Browse or search for the user&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Enrol button opposite the user. The user will indent in the list and the enrol button will disappear, indicating that the user is enrolled.&lt;br /&gt;
# When you have finished, click the &#039;Finish enrolling users&#039; button (or simply close the enrol users box)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user will then appear in the list of enrolled users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: The enrolment option &#039;Recover user&#039;s old grades if possible&#039; is not ticked by default and is easy to miss. An admin can make it so that the checkbox is ticked for all courses on the site by enabling the setting &#039;Recover grades default&#039; in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Grades &amp;gt; General settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Method 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:manually enrolling users.png|thumb|Enrolling users method 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Enrolment methods&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Enrol users&#039; icon in the edit column opposite manual enrolment&lt;br /&gt;
# Select users from the not enrolled users list, using Ctrl + click to select multiple users&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the add button to add the users to the enrolled users list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Editing individual enrolment start and end dates===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:individualenrolment24.png|thumb|Editing enrolment start and end dates]]Enrolment start and end dates may be edited for individual students as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Enrolled users&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the edit icon in the enrolment methods column for a particular user.&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit dates as required, then click the &#039;Save changes&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Admin settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manual enrolment plugin may be enabled or disabled site-wide in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Enrolments &amp;gt; Manage enrol plugins.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Site-wide settings, including default settings for manual enrolment in new courses, may be set via &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Enrolments &amp;gt; Manual enrolments&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Enrolment expiration action - specifies what happens when user enrolments reach expiration date. Please note that option &amp;quot;Unenrol user from course&amp;quot; purges grades, group memberships, preferences and other user related data from the courses.&lt;br /&gt;
* Hour to send enrolment expiry notifications - specify hour for sending expiration notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
* Add instance to new courses- if this is enabled, then whenever a new course is created, manual enrolments will automatically added to new courses.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enable manual enrolments - this specifies if enrol instances are enabled by default in new courses, it is strongly recommended to keep this setting enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
* Default role - this sets the default role, which is normally student and may be altered by a teacher in a course.&lt;br /&gt;
* Default enrolment duration - this sets the default length of enrolment in new courses.&lt;br /&gt;
* Notify before enrolment expires - specifies if teacher or optionally students should be notified before the expiration.&lt;br /&gt;
* Notification threshold - specify how many days should be users notified before the enrolment expiration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Manual enrolment capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/enrol/manual:config|Configure manual enrol instances]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/enrol/manual:enrol|Enrol users]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/enrol/manual:manage|Manage user enrolments]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/enrol/manual:unenrol|Unenrol users from the course]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/enrol/manual:unenrolself|Unenrol self from the course]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Enrolled users]] &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/bo1hX8tVw5U Manually Enrolling Users]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Manuelle Einschreibung]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Inscripción manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:手動登録]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Text_editor&amp;diff=107730</id>
		<title>Text editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Text_editor&amp;diff=107730"/>
		<updated>2014-03-06T04:22:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Editing text}}&lt;br /&gt;
The text editor (sometimes referred to as the &#039;HTML editor&#039; or even &#039;TinyMCE&#039;) has many icons to assist the user in entering content.  Many of these icons and functions should be familiar to anyone who uses a word processor.  Some examples of where you will see the text editor include: Editing Section headings, description of an activity, writing an answer to a quiz question or editing the content of many blocks. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; It&#039;s possible to disable the TinyMCE editor and only use a plain text editor from &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Text editors&amp;gt;Manage editors.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The collapsed editor==&lt;br /&gt;
Since Moodle 2.5, the text editor appears collapsed with no formatting in many places to save space. To access the full editor, click &amp;quot;Show editing tools&amp;quot;  as in (1) in the screenshot below. You can use keyboard shortcuts for quick formatting as in (2) in the screenshot below.  (See [[Text editor FAQ]] for a list of shortcuts.) To increase the size of the editor, drag the bottom right once you have clicked &amp;quot;Show editing tools&amp;quot; as in (3) in the screenshot below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:collapsededitor1.png|thumb|The collapsed editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:expandeditor.png|thumb|The expanded editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The full editor==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:HTMLeditor tools M2 1.png|thumb|The standard version of the text editor tool bar]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==List of groups==&lt;br /&gt;
For those who are not familiar with the tool bar, here are the functions listed by group using the above example.  Remember that the site administrator can edit or provide additional toolbars.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Row 1&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Image:HTML_editor_group_font_style.png]] - Font, size and heading group&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Image:HTML_editor_group_undo_redo.png]] - Undo and Redo group&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Image:HTML_editor_group_find_replace.png]] - Find and Replace group&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Image:HTML_editor_group_fullscreen_1.png]]|Full screen toggle&lt;br /&gt;
Row 2&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Image:HTML editor group text effects.png]] - Text effect group&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Image:HTML editor group line format.png]] - Line format group&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Image:HTML_editor_group_formatting.png]] - Formatting group&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Image:HTML_editor_group_color.png]] - Color group&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Image:HTML_editor_group_paragraph.png]] - Paragraph group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Row 3&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Image:HTML_editor_group_lists.png]] - Number and Bullets and indents&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Image:HTML_editor_group_link.png]] - Link group&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Image:HTML_editor_group_insert.png]] - Insert group&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Image:HTML_editor_group_HTML_spell.png]] - HTML source toggle and spellchecker (IE 9/8 only)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Special features==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Color pickers===&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Image:HTML_editor_group_color.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
There are four levels of selecting a font or background color, &lt;br /&gt;
*A quick pick 5x8 matrix of colors&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;More colors&amp;quot; that links to Picker, Pallet and Named tabs&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:HTML_editor_color_selector_basic_1.png|A quick pick 5x8 matrix of colors&lt;br /&gt;
Image:HTML_editor_color_selector_more_picker_1.png|A rainbow color picker tab&lt;br /&gt;
Image:HTML_editor_color_selector_more_pallet_1.png|A Pallet tab with a 18x12 matrix of colors&lt;br /&gt;
Image:HTML_editor_color_selector_more_named_1.png|A Named tab with custom pallets&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Insert images and media===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:HTML_editor_group_insert_MU_1.png|thumb|The Insert images and media group]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* 1 Insert Image - uses [[File picker]]&lt;br /&gt;
* 2 Insert Emoticon &lt;br /&gt;
* 3 Insert Media - uses [[File picker]]&lt;br /&gt;
* 4 Insert Equation - uses java script editor&lt;br /&gt;
* 5 Insert Non breaking space &lt;br /&gt;
* 6 Insert Custom character - Special keyboard characters&lt;br /&gt;
* 7 Insert Table -&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:Files_File_picker_upload_files_add_1.png|File picker Upload file screen&lt;br /&gt;
Image:HTML editor equation editor 1.png|Equation editor&lt;br /&gt;
Image:HTML_editor_custom_character_selector_1.png|Custom character selector&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Insert table====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;300px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image:HTMLeditor_Insert_Table_general_1.png|General tab&lt;br /&gt;
Image:HTMLeditor_Insert_Table_advanced_1.png|Advanced tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;To add borders to a table&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cell borders are crucial for helping readers to follow the rows across the screen. If they aren’t showing already you can add them as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Wiki page containing your table, click its Edit tab&lt;br /&gt;
#Carefully select all the cells of the table&lt;br /&gt;
#Then right click (Macs: Command+click or Ctrl+Click) over any part of your selection to get a context menu; from it select Cell &amp;gt; Table Cell Properties; the cell properties dialog box then loads.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on its Advanced tab, set Border Color to black (for instance), then click Apply, and then click Update.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click Save; the Wiki page containing your table will then load displaying its borders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Manage editors===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A site administrator can enable / disable text editors in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Text editors &amp;gt; Manage editors&#039;&#039;. By default the TinyMCE HTML editor and plain text area are enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===TinyMCE editor settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The TinyMCE  HTML editor has its own settings page &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Text editors&amp;gt;TinyMCE HTML editor&amp;gt;General settings&#039;&#039; with the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Plugins====&lt;br /&gt;
*Buttons for equations, emoticons,images, media, automatic linking, and  legacy spell-checking may be enabled, disabled or uninstall here by clicking on their eye.&lt;br /&gt;
*Additionally the equation, emoticon and spell check buttons have links to their Settings screens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:legacyspellchecker.png |thumb|none|upright=2.0|alt=&amp;quot;The TinyMCE editor plugins screen&amp;quot; | The TinyMCE editor plugins screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Insert equation=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Accessed from &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Text editors&amp;gt;TinyMCE HTML editor&amp;gt;Edit equation&#039;&#039;, this allows you to enable or disable the  TeX filter in the editor context and thereby display the Dragmath button. If you have a global custom TeX filter, then disable this setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====Insert emoticon=====&lt;br /&gt;
Accessed from &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Text editors&amp;gt;TinyMCE HTML editor&amp;gt;Insert emoticon&#039;&#039;, this allows you to enable or disable the emoticon filter in the editor context and thereby display the emoticon button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Legacy spell checker=====&lt;br /&gt;
The legacy spell checker is visible in IE9 and lower only, but not in other browsers. If you want to disable it and and rely on browser spell checker functionality instead, you can do this by disabling the &#039;&#039;legacy spellchecker&#039;&#039; plugin by clicking its eye in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Text editors &amp;gt; TinyMCE HTML editor &amp;gt; General settings&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To spell-check via your browser, type your word (which if incorrectly spelt will have red lines under it) and press right click + CTRL&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Browserspellcheck.png|thumb|Right-click+CTRL for browser spellcheck]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can select a different spell engine from &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Text editors &amp;gt; TinyMCE HTML editor&amp;gt;Check spelling&#039;&#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Spellengine.png|thumb|Choosing a different spell engine]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
According to: http://php.net/manual/en/book.pspell.php&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;As of php 5.3. Pspell is no longer supported/bundled. Instead you can use the enchant which is bundled by default in 5.3.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
While the default spell engine is Google spell which  can be changed in &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Text editors&amp;gt;TinyMCE HTML editor&#039;&#039;, this is no longer supported by Google and will not work. (Note that it is only visible in IE9 and lower) It is due to  be removed. See MDL-38867. In browser spell check is recommended.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If PSpell is selected then aspell 0.50 or later must be installed on your server and the path to aspell set in Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; System Paths.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Customising the editor toolbar===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can remove or add buttons to the TinyMCE editor toolbar by altering the Editor toolbar box in &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Text editors&amp;gt;TinyMCE HTML editor&amp;gt;General settings&#039;&#039; as demonstrated in the screencast [http://youtu.be/vTW1DImro9c Customise the text editor in 2.4]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:editortoolbar.png|thumb|The Editor toolbar box]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:horizontalrule.png|thumb|Example of simpler toolbar with added horizontal rule button]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:inserttime.png|thumb|An &amp;quot;insert time&amp;quot; button has been added]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Available fonts list====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to the default fonts, a site administrator can add extra fonts by typing their name and string in the box in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Text editors &amp;gt; TinyMCE HTML editor&amp;gt;General settings&#039;&#039; as demonstrated in the screencast [http://youtu.be/udP7Bnur30Y How to add extra fonts].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:comicsans.png|thumb|Example of custom font]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Custom configuration====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A setting in  &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Text editors&amp;gt;TinyMCE HTML editor&amp;gt;General settings&#039;&#039; provides  a box in which an administrator can apply custom formats. See MDL-37186 for more details with examples,  and see also the [http://www.tinymce.com/wiki.php/Configuration:formats TinyMCE configuration page]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:bottomtoolbar.png|thumb| Example 1:Toolbar at the bottom]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:customstyles.png|thumb| Example 2: Custom styles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Example: Moving the toolbar to the bottom:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add the following:&lt;br /&gt;
 {&amp;quot;theme_advanced_toolbar_location&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;bottom&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Example: Adding your own custom styles.&lt;br /&gt;
(This might be useful for example if you want a &amp;quot;house style&amp;quot; for important notes, key points or similar)&lt;br /&gt;
In the editor toolbar, enter &amp;quot;styleselect&amp;quot; and then in the custom box add the following code, changing it to suit your purposes:&lt;br /&gt;
 {&amp;quot;style_formats&amp;quot; : [&lt;br /&gt;
  {&amp;quot;title&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;Bold text&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;inline&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;b&amp;quot;},&lt;br /&gt;
  {&amp;quot;title&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;Red text&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;inline&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;span&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;styles&amp;quot; : {&amp;quot;color&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;#ff0000&amp;quot;}},&lt;br /&gt;
  {&amp;quot;title&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;Red header&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;block&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;h1&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;styles&amp;quot; : {&amp;quot;color&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;#ff0000&amp;quot;}} ]}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following will let you use bootstrap CSS classes if you use a bootstrap based theme:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    {&amp;quot;style_formats&amp;quot; : [&lt;br /&gt;
        {&amp;quot;title&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;Well&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;block&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;div&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;classes&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;well&amp;quot;},&lt;br /&gt;
        {&amp;quot;title&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;Label&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;inline&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;span&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;classes&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;label&amp;quot;},&lt;br /&gt;
        {&amp;quot;title&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;Label - success&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;inline&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;span&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;classes&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;label label-success&amp;quot;},&lt;br /&gt;
        {&amp;quot;title&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;Label - warning&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;inline&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;span&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;classes&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;label label-warning&amp;quot;},&lt;br /&gt;
        {&amp;quot;title&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;Label - important&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;inline&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;span&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;classes&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;label label-important&amp;quot;},&lt;br /&gt;
        {&amp;quot;title&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;Label - info&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;inline&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;span&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;classes&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;label label-info&amp;quot;},&lt;br /&gt;
        {&amp;quot;title&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;Label - inverse&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;inline&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;span&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;classes&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;label label-inverse&amp;quot;},&lt;br /&gt;
        {&amp;quot;title&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;Button&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;inline&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;a&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;classes&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;btn btn&amp;quot;},&lt;br /&gt;
        {&amp;quot;title&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;Button - primary&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;inline&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;a&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;classes&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;btn btn-primary&amp;quot;},&lt;br /&gt;
        {&amp;quot;title&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;Button - info&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;inline&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;a&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;classes&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;btn btn-info&amp;quot;},&lt;br /&gt;
        {&amp;quot;title&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;Button - success&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;inline&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;a&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;classes&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;btn btn-success&amp;quot;},&lt;br /&gt;
        {&amp;quot;title&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;Button - warning&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;inline&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;a&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;classes&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;btn btn-warning&amp;quot;},&lt;br /&gt;
        {&amp;quot;title&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;Button - danger&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;inline&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;a&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;classes&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;btn btn-danger&amp;quot;},&lt;br /&gt;
        {&amp;quot;title&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;Button - inverse&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;inline&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;a&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;classes&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;btn btn-inverse&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
    ]}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Example: Enabling copy of rich content with styles from MS Word (tm) and paste into TineMCE without removing important styles:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 {&amp;quot;paste_retain_style_properties&amp;quot; : &amp;quot;margin, padding, width, height, font-size, &lt;br /&gt;
   font-weight, font-family, color, text-align, ul, ol, li, &lt;br /&gt;
   text-decoration, border, background, float, display&amp;quot;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/bBZQYGcDaMg Moodle 2.0 HTML Editor - Row 1]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/uS_M6-eHsxE Moodle 2.0 HTML Editor - Row 2]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/3rRztnWkhuY Moodle 2.0 HTML Editor - Row 3]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Text editor FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text-Editor]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Upload_users&amp;diff=107495</id>
		<title>Upload users</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Upload_users&amp;diff=107495"/>
		<updated>2014-01-25T03:52:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Accounts}}&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can upload multiple user accounts via text file in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Accounts &amp;gt; Upload users&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many robust options for uploading information (fields associated with a user) with this method: from enrolling users in multiple courses with course specific [[Roles|roles]] to updating user information in the [[User profile]] to deleting users from the site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rather than uploading the text file, it can simply dragged from the desktop and dropped into the upload area, as demonstrated in the screencast [http://youtu.be/6E-TQXTkZB0 Drag and drop new users into Moodle 2.3] (by Mary Cooch).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; It is usually not necessary to upload users in bulk with Upload users.  To keep maintenance work down you should first explore forms of authentication that do not require manual maintenance, such as [[External database authentication|connecting to existing external databases]] or letting the users create their own accounts ([[Self enrolment]]). See [[Authentication]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:uploadusersnew.png|thumb|center|Initial upload users screen]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Upload user process==&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an outline of the process:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Create file for uploading&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Accounts &amp;gt; Upload users&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Add file to upload&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload users preview - check settings and default user profile settings&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload users preview - click &amp;quot;Upload users&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload users results - shows list of users, exceptions made in upload and summary of number of users&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload users results - click &amp;quot;Continue&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# Returns to Upload users screen&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Updating users preview==&lt;br /&gt;
There are settings for the kind of Upload user function you want to perform on the &amp;quot;Upload users preview&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Upload users preview 2.0.JPG|thumb|center|Upload users preview in Moodle 2.x]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Updating existing accounts===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default Moodle adds new user accounts and skips existing users lines where the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;username&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; matches an existing account. Set &amp;quot;Upload Type&amp;quot; to &#039;&#039;&#039;Add  new and update existing users&#039;&#039;&#039;, and existing user account will be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
*Add all, append number to usernames if needed&lt;br /&gt;
*Add new and update existing users&lt;br /&gt;
*Update existing users only&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Warning&#039;&#039;&#039;: errors updating existing accounts can affect your users badly. Be careful when using the options to update.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Additional Options===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are also fields settings to force password change, allow renames, allow deletes, prevent email address duplicates, standardise usernames and select for bulk operations(new users. updated users, all users).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Standardise usernames - This folds username to lowercase and strips out illegal characters.  This is roughly equivalent to: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  $username = preg_replace(&#039;/[^-\.@_a-z0-9]/&#039;, &#039;&#039;, $username);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Set default user values===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may be able to set default user field values, if the fields were not included in the uploaded file on this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Upload user results ==&lt;br /&gt;
After accepting the preview settings by clicking on &amp;quot;Upload users&amp;quot;, you should see the the Upload users results screen.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Upload users results 2.0.JPG|thumb|center|The results screen; everything went well!]]&lt;br /&gt;
This screen will show you any exceptions or changes that were made to each user in the upload process.   For example if you were updating user information, the updated information will be shown.  Or if a user was not added that record will be highlighted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen will summarize how many users were uploaded or updated, indicate the number of weak passwords and the number of errors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==File formats for upload users file==&lt;br /&gt;
The upload users file has fields separated by a comma (or other delimiter) ONLY - no space.   The first line contains the valid field names.  The rest of the lines (records) contain information about each user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;:Tip:&#039;&#039; Avoid special characters in field information like quotes or other commas. Test a file with only one record before a large upload. Remember there are other ways to authenticate users on you site or enroll users in a course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;:Tip:&#039;&#039; You can use a spread sheet program to create the file with the required columns and fields. Then save the file as &amp;quot;CSV (comma delimited)&amp;quot;. These files can be opened with simple text editors for verification. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Valid upload file for testing===&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of a simple valid upload file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;username,password,firstname,lastname,email,course1,group1,cohort1&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
jonest,verysecret,Tom,Jones,jonest@someplace.edu,math102,Section 1,year 3&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
reznort,somesecret,Trent,Reznor,reznort@someplace.edu,math102,Section 3,year 4&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fields that can be included===&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;:Tip:&#039;&#039; We strongly recommend that you test a file that contains fields you proposed to use with one user before attempting a file upload for the first time.  http://demo.moodle.net might be a good place to see if your test file works.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Required fields&#039;&#039;&#039;: &lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;username,firstname,lastname,email&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:Validity checks are performed for:&lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;username&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; can only contain alphabetical &#039;&#039;&#039;lowercase&#039;&#039;&#039; letters , numbers, hypen &#039;-&#039;, underscore &#039;_&#039;, period &#039;.&#039;, or at-sign &#039;@&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
#&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;email&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is in the form: &#039;&#039;name@example.com&#039;&#039; .&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Password field&#039;&#039;&#039;: &amp;quot;password&amp;quot; field is optional if &amp;quot;Create password if needed&amp;quot; setting is chosen (default). &lt;br /&gt;
**If included, values should meet the requirements for the site&#039;s [[Site_policies#Password_policy|Password policy]]. To force password change for a particular user, set the password field to &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;changeme&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
**If omitted, a password will be generated for each user (during the next Cron job) and welcome e-mails sent out.&lt;br /&gt;
**Note: the text for the welcome e-mail is in the language settings. Please refer to this [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=210359&amp;amp;parent=917138 forum thread]for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Optional fields&#039;&#039;&#039;: To provide values other than the default include one or more of these&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;institution,department,city,country,lang,auth,timezone,idnumber,icq,phone1,phone2,address,url,description,mailformat,maildisplay,htmleditor,autosubscribe&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Country- use a country TWO LETTER CODE&lt;br /&gt;
*Some fields have a maximum number of characters that are allowed (notably institution should be &#039;&#039;&#039;at most 40 characters&#039;&#039;&#039; long).  See hints below.&lt;br /&gt;
*Maildisplay, htmleditor and autosubscribe can be set from an import screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Custom profile field names&#039;&#039;&#039;: (Optional). xxxxx is the real custom user profile field name (i.e. the unique shortname)&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;profile_field_xxxxx&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Create the custom fields BEFORE importing. Use the standard header. The &amp;quot;shortname&amp;quot; for your custom field is xxxxx (NB the shortname must be all lowercase, otherwise won&#039;t be recognised). The first record must include &amp;quot;profile_field_xxxxx&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Example&#039;&#039;&#039;: To create a custom field &amp;quot;genre&amp;quot;, you must write a shortname &amp;quot;genre&amp;quot; in the new field, and write &amp;quot;profile_field_genre&amp;quot; in the header of the .csv file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
: For custom profile fields that are a menu, use the corresponding value (new in Moodle 2.3 onwards).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;Example&#039;&#039;&#039;: A custom field &#039;Department&#039; with one of three values &#039;HR&#039;, &#039;Marketing&#039; or &#039;Training&#039;. Just insert one of those three words (e.g. &#039;Training&#039;) as the value for that field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special fields&#039;&#039;&#039;: Used for changing of usernames or deleting of users&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;oldusername&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;deleted&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Enrolment fields&#039;&#039;&#039;: (Optional):&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;course1,type1,role1,group1,enrolperiod1,course2,type2,role2,group2,enrolperiod2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;course&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the &amp;quot;shortname&amp;quot; of the course, if present the user will be enrolled in those courses.&lt;br /&gt;
:* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;type&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; refers to the role to be used for associated course enrolment. Value 1 is default course role, 2 is legacy Teacher role and 3 is legacy Non-editing Teacher.&lt;br /&gt;
:* You can use role field instead to specify roles directly - use either role short name or id (numeric names of roles are not supported).&lt;br /&gt;
:* Users may be also assigned to groups in course (group1 in course1, group2 in course2, etc.).&lt;br /&gt;
:* A group is identified by name or id (numeric group names are not supported)&lt;br /&gt;
:* You can set the enrolment duration, in days, for each course (&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;enrolperiod1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;course1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;enrolperiod2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;course2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, etc.).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Cohort field&#039;&#039;&#039;: (Optional):&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;cohort1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Internal cohort id numbers or non-numeric Cohort IDs of existing cohorts must be used; names are not allowed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;mnethostid&#039;&#039;&#039; (Optional)&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
Existing [[MNet]]users can be added to courses, groups or cohorts as below:&lt;br /&gt;
#enrolling to courses: username+mnethostid+course required&lt;br /&gt;
# adding to group: username+mnethostid+course+group required&lt;br /&gt;
#adding to cohort: username+mnethostid+cohort required&lt;br /&gt;
#suspending/reviving accounts: username+mnethostid+suspended required&lt;br /&gt;
All other operations are ignored. You can not add users, delete them or update them (such as change names or email, profile fields, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Commas within  a field must be encoded as &amp;amp;#44 - the script will decode these back to commas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For Boolean fields, use &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;0&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for false and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for true.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To prevent users from receiving a large number of emails from courses or forced subscription forums use the &#039;&#039;&#039;maildigest&#039;&#039;&#039;.  The options for this field are 0 = No digest, 1 = Complete digest and 2 = Digest with just subjects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Advanced potentials of Upload user==&lt;br /&gt;
===Templates===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note: This section needs checking and updating if necessary for Moodle 2.0. Please do so and remove this note when finished.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default values are processed as templates in which the following codes are allowed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* %l - will be replaced by the lastname&lt;br /&gt;
* %f - will be replaced by the firstname&lt;br /&gt;
* %u - will be replaced by the username&lt;br /&gt;
* %% - will be replaced by the %&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Between the percent sign (%) and any code letter (l, f or u) the following modifiers are allowed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* (-) minus sign - the information specified by the code letter will be converted to lowercase&lt;br /&gt;
* (+) plus sign - the information specified by the code letter will be converted to UPPERCASE&lt;br /&gt;
* (~) tilde sign - the information specified by the code letter will be converted to Title Case&lt;br /&gt;
* a decimal number - the information specified by the code letter will be truncated to that many characters&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if the firstname is John and the lastname is Doe, the following values will be obtained with the specified templates:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* %l%f = DoeJohn&lt;br /&gt;
* %l%1f = DoeJ&lt;br /&gt;
* %-l%+f = doeJOHN&lt;br /&gt;
* %-f_%-l = john_doe&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt; http://www.example.com/~%u/&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; results in  &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://www.example.com/~jdoe/&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; (if the username is jdoe or %-1f%-l)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Template processing is done only on default values, and not on the values retrieved from the CSV file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to create correct Moodle usernames, the username is always converted to lowercase. Moreover, if the &amp;quot;Allow extended characters in usernames&amp;quot; option in the Site policies page is off, characters different to letters, digits, dash (-) and dot (.) are removed. For example if the firstname is John Jr. and the lastname is Doe, the username %-f_%-l will produce john jr._doe when Allow extended characters in usernames is on, and johnjr.doe when off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the &amp;quot;New username duplicate handling&amp;quot; setting is set to Append counter, an auto-increment counter will be append to duplicate usernames produced by the template. For example, if the CSV file contains the users named John Doe, Jane Doe and Jenny Doe without explicit usernames, the default username is %-1f%-l and New username duplicate handling is set to Append counter, then the usernames produced will be jdoe, jdoe2 and jdoe3.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Deleting accounts===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;deleted&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; field is present, users with value 1 for it will be deleted. In this case, all the fields may be omitted, except for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;username&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. After uploading the file, be sure to change the &amp;quot;Upload type&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;Update existing users only&amp;quot; and the &amp;quot;Allow deletes&amp;quot; option to &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039;  A similar field is available for &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;suspended&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. This enables a user account to be temporarily disabled rather than completely removed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deleting and uploading accounts could be done with a single CSV file. For example, the following file will add the user Tom Jones and delete the user reznort:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;username,firstname,lastname,deleted&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
jonest,Tom,Jones,0&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
reznort,,,1&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Encoding file format==&lt;br /&gt;
On the initial Upload user screen, you may select the file encoding format from a pull down list.  These include UTF-8 (the default), ASCII,  ISO-8859-1 to ISO-8859-11 or any one of over 36 formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Hints==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Spreadsheet===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you use a spreadsheet program such as Excel to create your .csv file, check the resulting output in a text editor before you upload it.  It is possible to get trailing commas on each line from an empty field if you have added and deleted columns of information prior to saving the final file. Also check the character encoding. A csv file is a simple text file (ASCII or Unicode) that can be used to upload user accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Excel translates passwords that begin with - (minus) or + (plus) as zero. Even when saving as .csv and saying &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;Keep this format, and leave out any incompatible features.&amp;quot; Check for this before uploading, as a zero halts the upload process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you use a formula in Excel to create fields (for example, the concatenate function to create a user name), then remember to copy the cells with the formula and use special paste with values checked to make them into an acceptable data for a csv file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The upload will also fail if you have trailing spaces at the end of your data fields. Often, this can not be removed with a simple Find &amp;quot; &amp;quot; and Replace with &amp;quot;&amp;quot;. If information has been copied from web sources than it is possible to include non-breaking spaces which will prevent your upload from being completed correctly. To find these invisible spaces, use the Find and Replace function in Excel. In the find field, hold alt and type 0160. Leave the replace field blank. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Country===&lt;br /&gt;
The country should be written as a two letter code, in capitals. For example, use BE for Belgium or NL for the Netherlands.  Using &amp;quot;be&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;nl&amp;quot; as a country code will result in a database error.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039;  If you are having trouble working out the two-letter code for a country, you can consult the list of [http://www.iso.org/iso/country_names_and_code_elements country names and code elements] available on the ISO Website. A common error is to use UK for United Kingdom; it should be GB.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Field size limits===&lt;br /&gt;
Some fields have maximum character lengths.  Typically the file will import to the preview list screen but not finish the process.  Turn on debug to see the fields that are too long.  Common fields to cause problems are &amp;quot;Institution&amp;quot; which is limited to 40 characters, and &amp;quot;City&amp;quot;, also limited (20 characters).  The error will be &amp;quot;User not added - error&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===All fields listed here===&lt;br /&gt;
:All the fields that are valid are listed below, except for any custom fields you may have created. &lt;br /&gt;
firstname, lastname, username, email, city, country, lang, timezone, mailformat, maildisplay, maildigest, htmleditor, ajax, autosubscribe ,institution, department, idnumber, skype , msn, aim, yahoo, icq, phone1, phone2, address, url, description, descriptionformat, password, auth, oldusername , deleted, suspended, course1, course2, course3, course4&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/PFGLZnuu_JI Adding users by using a CSV in Moodle]  MoodleBites video on YouTube&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Flat file]] enrolment&lt;br /&gt;
* [[User profile fields]] for details of how to include data about custom user profile fields in the upload users file&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=36851 Can I auto enroll from Excel?]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=97903 Uploading users to custom roles]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=181259 User upload option: standardise usernames]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=144569 Matriculacion con flat file csv] - discussion in Spanish&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Importer des utilisateurs]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:ユーザのアップロード]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Nutzerliste hochladen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Automated_course_backup&amp;diff=107494</id>
		<title>Automated course backup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Automated_course_backup&amp;diff=107494"/>
		<updated>2014-01-25T03:46:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Backup}}&lt;br /&gt;
A site administrator can configure a schedule for automated course backups in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; &amp;gt; Courses &amp;gt; Backups &amp;gt; Automated backup setup&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Automated course backups runs the same functions as individual [[Course backup|course backups]]. It&#039;s a good idea to schedule backups for when your server isn&#039;t usually busy. Running the backup tool over all the courses can be processor-intensive, so you shouldn&#039;t run it when there are a lot of students trying to access the server. You should always alert users with an announcement on the first page that if they log on during the backup hours they may notice a decrease in performance.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to make scheduled backups, you have to set up CRON to run periodically. Please refer to the [[Cron|cron instructions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setting an automated course backup schedule==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set the backup schedule:&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; &amp;gt; Courses &amp;gt; Backups &amp;gt; Automated backup setup&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Set backup_auto_active to enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the days of the week to run the backup.&lt;br /&gt;
#Set the execution time for the backup process. For most servers, early morning will be the best time.  Keep in mind the time zone your server is using.&lt;br /&gt;
#Set the &amp;quot;Save to...&amp;quot; path. If you can, choose a backup path on another machine or on a different drive than the one Moodle is on. You don’t want to lose your backups at the same time you lose your Moodle site if the drive fails. If you leave the field blank, then backup zip files will be saved in the backup folder of each course files folder. On a Linux server the path might look like: /home/(your user or domain)/public_html/archive/ or if it&#039;s below the publicly accessible folders: /home/(your user or domain)/archive/ if the path is not recognized a red X is shown after saving, otherwise a green check.&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose whether to skip the backup of hidden courses or courses which have not been modified within a specified number of days, or not modified since the last backup (new settings in Moodle 2.4 onwards).&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you&#039;ve set up your backup schedule, Moodle will automatically create archives of all the courses on the server at the time you specified. Once the backup is complete, Moodle will send you an email describing the status of the backup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Use course names for your backups===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the backups will be named according to the course ID, which is not always easily recognisable. Check the box &#039;&#039;Use course name in backup filename&#039;&#039; in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Courses &amp;gt; Backups &amp;gt; Automated backup setup&#039;&#039; to have them saved with the course shortname instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Backups report==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A last execution log of scheduled course backups can be found in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Reports &amp;gt; Backups&#039;&#039;. It displays a list of all course backups made, the time taken to create them, their status (see below), and the next scheduled automated backup execution time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on a particular course name will cause a detailed execution log to be displayed, including date, hour and minute when each step of the backup was performed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Reports_Site_Backups_1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Backup status===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; - The course backup was successfully completed.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Skipped&#039;&#039;&#039; - The course was skipped (not backed up) because the course was unavailable to students and had not been changed in the last 31 days. This is not an error, but a feature designed to save process time.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Unfinished&#039;&#039;&#039; - The backup was not finished. This might have happened because the job to execute backups ran out of time or resources (e.g., the cron running the backups ran out of time before finishing all the courses waiting). The unfinished jobs should be completed when the next scheduled backups are repeated. &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Error&#039;&#039;&#039; - There were errors in the backup process for the course, so a backup was not completed. For additional details about the error (1) check the backup log for the affected course (i.e., click the course name in the backups log), or (2) back up the course manually with debugging turned on to see what error message is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Course versus site backups==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Automated course backups are more expensive in terms of time and CPU usage. The recovery time to have your site running again is longer. &lt;br /&gt;
*Course backups are useful for obtaining &amp;quot;fresh&amp;quot; copies of courses to be re-used or distributed individually, however they should never be used as a primary backup system (unless your hosting doesn&#039;t allow the preferred [[Site backup|site backups]]). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/rg6rUuBwITo Moodle 2 Administration Courses ] MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
* MDL-30725 Automated backups with external storage fill trashdir&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=167471 Where is the Moodle 2.0 &amp;quot;Course Backup Filearea&amp;quot;?]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=191275 the story of the mysteriously filling up hard disk]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Report]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Ikastaroen_segurtasun-kopia_automatikoa]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Sauvegarde (administrateur)]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:自動コースバックアップ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Automatische Kurssicherung]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Respaldo de curso automatizado]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Adding_a_new_course&amp;diff=107493</id>
		<title>Adding a new course</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Adding_a_new_course&amp;diff=107493"/>
		<updated>2014-01-25T03:37:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ formatting fix&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Courses}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default a regular teacher can&#039;t add a new course. To add a new course to Moodle you need to have either [[Administrator|Adminstrator]], [[Course creator|Course Creator]] or [[Manager|Manager]] rights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding a course==&lt;br /&gt;
To add a course:&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to &#039;&#039;Settings&amp;gt;Site Administration&amp;gt;Courses&amp;gt;Add/edit courses&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Addeditcourses.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose the category where you want your course to be. For more information see [[Course categories|Course categories]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the &amp;quot;Add a new course&amp;quot; button&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter the [[Course settings|course settings]], then click the &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
*On the next screen, choose your students/teachers to assign to the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Deleting a course(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A regular teacher can&#039;t delete a course. Administrators and managers (i.e. users with a role for which the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:delete|moodle/course:delete]] is allowed) can delete courses. A [[Course creator|Course creator]] can delete courses they have created themselves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To delete a course (as an administrator or manager):&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Courses &amp;gt; Add/edit courses&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the course&#039;s category (to drill down the category tree) and find the course you wish to delete. Or use the &amp;quot;Search course&amp;quot; textbox at the bottom of the category list.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the &amp;quot;X&amp;quot; icon to the right of the course&#039;s name to delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete multiple courses by: &lt;br /&gt;
*Creating a new (temporary) category. You can name it &amp;quot;To be deleted&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select and &#039;&#039;&#039;move&#039;&#039;&#039; the &amp;quot;About to be deleted&amp;quot; courses to that category (&amp;quot;To be deleted&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
*Delete the category (&amp;quot;To be deleted&amp;quot;) and choose &amp;quot;Delete ALL - cannot be undone&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no user interface for course creators to delete courses they have created, however they can do so by editing the URL of the course from &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://yourmoodlesite.net/course/view.php?id=N&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; to &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://yourmoodlesite.net/course/delete.php?id=N&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; (replacing &#039;view&#039; with &#039;delete&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Course requests==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Courserequest.png|thumb|Course request screen]]The course request feature can be enabled by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Courses &amp;gt; Course request&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An admin can set the default category for course requests, whether users can select a category when requesting a course, and who can receive notification of course requests (from a list of users with the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/site:approvecourse|moodle/site:approvecourse]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A  &#039;Request a new course&#039; button will then appear on the &#039;All courses&#039; page. The All courses page can be accessed via a link in the [[Courses block]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If course requests are enabled, by default all authenticated users can make course requests. See [[Course requester role]] for details of how to restrict users who can make course requests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bulk course creation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is not yet possible to create courses in bulk, however this feature is coming in Moodle 2.6 (MDL-13114).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/vOm1NAknuvk Creating a Course and Course Settings] MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/rg6rUuBwITo Moodle 2 Administration Courses] MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=83830 Hide Courses from some users or students] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Kurs anlegen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Cursos_%28administrador%29]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Ikastaroak_%28Kudeatzaileak%29]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Adding_a_new_course&amp;diff=107492</id>
		<title>Adding a new course</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Adding_a_new_course&amp;diff=107492"/>
		<updated>2014-01-25T03:36:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video links&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Courses}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default a regular teacher can&#039;t add a new course. To add a new course to Moodle you need to have either [[Administrator|Adminstrator]], [[Course creator|Course Creator]] or [[Manager|Manager]] rights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding a course==&lt;br /&gt;
To add a course:&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to &#039;&#039;Settings&amp;gt;Site Administration&amp;gt;Courses&amp;gt;Add/edit courses&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Addeditcourses.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose the category where you want your course to be. For more information see [[Course categories|Course categories]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the &amp;quot;Add a new course&amp;quot; button&lt;br /&gt;
*Enter the [[Course settings|course settings]], then click the &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
*On the next screen, choose your students/teachers to assign to the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Deleting a course(s)==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A regular teacher can&#039;t delete a course. Administrators and managers (i.e. users with a role for which the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:delete|moodle/course:delete]] is allowed) can delete courses. A [[Course creator|Course creator]] can delete courses they have created themselves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To delete a course (as an administrator or manager):&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Courses &amp;gt; Add/edit courses&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the course&#039;s category (to drill down the category tree) and find the course you wish to delete. Or use the &amp;quot;Search course&amp;quot; textbox at the bottom of the category list.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the &amp;quot;X&amp;quot; icon to the right of the course&#039;s name to delete it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete multiple courses by: &lt;br /&gt;
*Creating a new (temporary) category. You can name it &amp;quot;To be deleted&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select and &#039;&#039;&#039;move&#039;&#039;&#039; the &amp;quot;About to be deleted&amp;quot; courses to that category (&amp;quot;To be deleted&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
*Delete the category (&amp;quot;To be deleted&amp;quot;) and choose &amp;quot;Delete ALL - cannot be undone&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no user interface for course creators to delete courses they have created, however they can do so by editing the URL of the course from &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://yourmoodlesite.net/course/view.php?id=N&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; to &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://yourmoodlesite.net/course/delete.php?id=N&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; (replacing &#039;view&#039; with &#039;delete&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Course requests==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Courserequest.png|thumb|Course request screen]]The course request feature can be enabled by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Courses &amp;gt; Course request&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An admin can set the default category for course requests, whether users can select a category when requesting a course, and who can receive notification of course requests (from a list of users with the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/site:approvecourse|moodle/site:approvecourse]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A  &#039;Request a new course&#039; button will then appear on the &#039;All courses&#039; page. The All courses page can be accessed via a link in the [[Courses block]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If course requests are enabled, by default all authenticated users can make course requests. See [[Course requester role]] for details of how to restrict users who can make course requests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Bulk course creation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is not yet possible to create courses in bulk, however this feature is coming in Moodle 2.6 (MDL-13114).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/vOm1NAknuvk Creating a Course and Course Settings] MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/rg6rUuBwITo Moodle 2 Administration Courses ] MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=83830 Hide Courses from some users or students] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Kurs anlegen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Cursos_%28administrador%29]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Ikastaroak_%28Kudeatzaileak%29]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Course_backup&amp;diff=107491</id>
		<title>Course backup</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Course_backup&amp;diff=107491"/>
		<updated>2014-01-25T03:33:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Backup}}&lt;br /&gt;
A course can be saved with some or all of its parts by using the course backup.  Typically, the site administrator will set a schedule of [[Automated course backup|automated course backups]] for the whole site.  A teacher with editing privileges can create a backup or download an existing backup for safe keeping, or for use on another Moodle site.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Backing up a course==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Backup of a course section.png|thumb|Schema selection, no user data selected in initial settings]]To backup a course&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Backup&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Initial settings - Select activities, blocks, filters and other items as required then click the Next button. Users with appropriate permissions, such as administrators and managers, can choose whether to [[Backup of user data|include users]], anonymize user information, or include user role assignments, user files, comments, user completion details, course logs and grade history in the backup.&lt;br /&gt;
# Schema settings  - Select/deselect specific items to include in backup then click the Next button&lt;br /&gt;
# Confirmation and review - Check that everything is as required, using the Previous button if necessary, otherwise click the &#039;Perform backup&#039; button&lt;br /&gt;
# Complete - Click the Continue button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A backup file (with distinctive .mbz extension to avoid confusion with .zip files) is then saved in the course backup area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Backup in Moodle 2.0 video:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;mediaplayer&amp;gt;http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mya-u0zAZZE&amp;lt;/mediaplayer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Anonymizing user information==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Anonymize user information is a backup feature which &amp;quot;protects user identities&amp;quot; by making each user anonymous. If this box is checked in the backup initial settings, Moodle will substitute aliases for real names, substituting @doesntexist.com email addresses and so forth. For example  &amp;quot;Max Manager&amp;quot; might become  &amp;quot;anonfirstname4 anonlastname4&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Backup and restore from 1.9 to 2==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Courses created in 1.9 can be backed up and then restored into a 2.1 Moodle or later but blocks are not currently restored and nor is user data (such as forum posts, grades, submissions etc).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Backup and restore of assignments from Moodle 2.2 and older==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The assignment activity module was completely rewritten in Moodle 2.3. Thus, assignments from Moodle 2.2 and older (e.g. from Moodle 1.9) need to be upgraded in order to continue being usable. See the section &#039;Restoring course backups from Moodle 2.2 and older&#039; in [[Assignment upgrade tool]] for details of what to do.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tips and tricks==&lt;br /&gt;
* Lose content after a restore in Moodle 2.0 ?  Do you see topic headings that say &amp;quot;Orphaned activities&amp;quot;?   Solution: Go to course settings and increase the number of topic sections and things will return to normal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creative uses==&lt;br /&gt;
The backup and restore processes can offer the teacher and administrators many creative solutions.&lt;br /&gt;
*Duplicating courses or specific activities in one course to another course (similar to Import)&lt;br /&gt;
*Updating a production Moodle site course, with material from a localhost site course&lt;br /&gt;
*Transferring a course to a new Moodle site.&lt;br /&gt;
*In earlier versions of Moodle, a way of rolling a course forward without past student activity&lt;br /&gt;
*Creating a blank activity, save just that activity and then restore it to the course or another course one or more times. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General backup defaults==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default settings for course backups can be set by a site administrator in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Courses &amp;gt; Backups &amp;gt; General backup defaults&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Selected settings may be locked, so that they cannot be changed when creating a course backup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By selecting a time in the &amp;quot;Keep logs for..&amp;quot;  dropdown, it is possible to specify how long backup  logs information is kept before being deleted. As this information may be very large, it is recommended the length of time chosen be quite short.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Course backup capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/backup:anonymise|Anonymise user data on backup]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/backup:backupcourse|Backup courses]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/backup:backupsection|Backup sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/backup:backuptargethub|Backup for hub]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/backup:backuptargetimport|Backup for import]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/backup:configure|Configure backup options]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/backup:downloadfile|Download files from backup areas]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/backup:userinfo|Backup user data]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Course restore]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Backup of user data]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Activity backup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/rg6rUuBwITo Moodle 2 Administration Courses ] MoodleBites video on YouTube&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Kurssicherung]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Respaldo del curso]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Ikastaroaren_Segurtasun-kopia]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Sauvegarde de cours]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:コースバックアップ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Course_settings&amp;diff=107490</id>
		<title>Course settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Course_settings&amp;diff=107490"/>
		<updated>2014-01-25T03:30:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Courses}}&lt;br /&gt;
A teacher, or other user with the [[Capabilities/moodle/course:update|update course settings capability]], can change course settings in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Edit settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:generalcourse25.png|thumb|General settings,expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Course full name===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the name of the course.  It is displayed as a link on course lists on the [[Front page]] and on [[My home]] and in reports.  It is also used in the browser title bar when the course is viewed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changefullname|moodle/course:changefullname]] controls whether a user can edit the course full name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Short name===&lt;br /&gt;
Many institutions have a shorthand way of referring to a course, such as BP102 or COMMS.  Even if you do not already have such a name for your course, make one up here.  It will be used in several places where the long name is not appropriate, such as the Navigation block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changeshortname|moodle/course:changeshortname]] controls whether a user can edit the short name field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, only course full names are displayed in the list of courses. However an administrator can enable short names to be displayed too if required by ticking the checkbox in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Courses&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Course category===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The site administrator may have created course categories to help teachers and students find their courses easily.  Course categories may be reflected in the [[Navigation block]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changecategory|moodle/course:changecategory]] controls whether a user can edit the course category.&lt;br /&gt;
===Course start date===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting affects the display of logs and the weekly format topic dates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you use the &amp;quot;Weekly&amp;quot; course format, the start date will appear in the first section of the course. For example selecting 27 July, will display &amp;quot;27 July - 2 August&amp;quot; in the first section (when default display is selected for that section).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting will have an effect on the display of logs. This will be the earliest possible date the log activity will display. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting will &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; affect courses using the &#039;social&#039; or &#039;topics&#039; formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; If your institution runs on a weekly schedule, you may want to consider setting the start date for courses on the first day of the week, like a Monday. Please note that the &#039;first day of the week&#039; is set by the [https://docs.moodle.org/dev/Translation_langconfig langconfig file] of your [[Language]], and might be different from the default Monday of the English language pack.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; In general, if your course does not have a real starting date then set the date to yesterday and use the availability setting to reveal the course to students.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; See self enrolment course settings to prevent students from entering the course before a certain date/time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Visible===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can &amp;quot;hide&amp;quot; your course completely. It will not appear on any course listings, except for managers, course creators, teachers and any other users with the [[Capabilities/moodle/course:viewhiddencourses|view hidden courses capability]]. Even if students try to access the course URL directly, they will not be allowed to enter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Capabilities/moodle/course:visibility|hide/show courses capability]] controls whether a user can hide a course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In earlier versions of Moodle, this setting was named &#039;Course availability&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Course ID number===&lt;br /&gt;
The ID number is an alphanumeric field.  It has several potential uses.  Generally, it is not displayed to students.  However, it can be used to match this course against an external system&#039;s ID, as your course catalogue ID or can be used in the certificate module as a printed field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changeidnumber|moodle/course:changeidnumber]] controls whether a user can edit the ID number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:descriptioncourse25.png|thumb|Description settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Course summary===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The summary appears on the course listings page.  This field is searched when searching for a course and also appears in the Course/Site description block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changesummary|moodle/course:changesummary]] controls whether a user can edit the course summary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Course summary files===&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
An image (and if allowed by the administrator, other file types) may be attached to the course summary. They will be accessible by anyone from outside of the course just like  the course name and/or summary. Only users with [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changesummary| moodle/course:changesummary capability]] are able to upload/change course summary files.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note that if this is not allowed by the administrator, then no box will appear to upload course summary files&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, only jpg, gif and png file types are allowed as course summary files. An administrator can change the allowed file types in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Courses&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Course format==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:coursefomat25.png|thumb|Course format settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Format===&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Course formats]]&lt;br /&gt;
===Number of sections===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting is only used by the &#039;weekly&#039; and &#039;topics&#039; course formats.  In the &#039;weekly&#039; format, it specifies the number of weeks that the course will run for, starting from the course starting date.  In the &#039;topics&#039; format, it specifies the number of topics in the course.  Both of these translate to the number of &amp;quot;boxes&amp;quot; down the middle of the course page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the number of weeks/topics is changed for an existing course so that the number is less than the number of course sections containing activities (for example the course contains activities in 3 sections and the number or weeks/topics is set to 2) then when editing is turned on section(s) at the bottom of the course page will be shown with the title &#039;Orphaned activities&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number of weeks/topics may be set to 0, so that only the top general section is displayed on the course page and there are no numbered sections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the maximum number of weeks/topics is 52, but an administrator can set a different maximum number which will apply to all courses on the site (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
===Hidden sections===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to decide how the hidden sections in your course are displayed to students.  By default, a small area is shown (in collapsed form, usually grey) to indicate where the hidden section is, though they still cannot actually see the hidden activities and texts.  This is particularly useful in the Weekly format, so that non-class weeks are clear, or if you have quizzes you don&#039;t want your students to see.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; If you choose, these non-available items can be completely hidden, so that students do not even know  that sections or an activity in the course are hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Course layout===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Course layout setting determines whether the whole course is displayed on one page or split over several pages. The setting currently applies to the topics and weekly core course formats and contributed collapsed topics course format only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers choose from the dropdown whether they wish to &amp;quot;show all sections on one page&amp;quot; in the familiar scrolling format, or &amp;quot;show one section per page&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If one section per page is selected, the course page is abbreviated to a list of links to individual sections. If an individual section is shown, next and previous sections may be accessed via links above and below the section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:one section per page course format.png|thumb|Course page for course using one section per page course layout]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Single_section_page.png|thumb|Individual section of a course using one section per page course layout]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Visit the School demo site course [http://school.demo.moodle.net/course/view.php?id=96 The Types of Sport] to see the &amp;quot;Show one section per page&amp;quot; course layout in action!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further details plus screenshots, see blog post [http://www.somerandomthoughts.com/blog/2012/05/08/moodle-2-3-section-per-page/ Moodle 2.3 – Section per page] by Gavin Henrick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Appearance==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:appearancecourse252.png|thumb|Appearance settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Force theme===&lt;br /&gt;
If the site administrator has allowed the teacher to set a course [[Themes|theme]], this pull down menu will appear with a list of themes on the site.  Teachers can use this to choose a different look for the course from the rest of the Moodle site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Force language===&lt;br /&gt;
If you force a language in a course, the interface of Moodle in this course will be in this particular language, even if a student has selected a different preferred language in his/her personal profile.&lt;br /&gt;
===News items to show===&lt;br /&gt;
How many news items should show the [[Latest news block]].   Set it to 0 and Latest news block will not appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Latest News block relies on the use of the associated News Forum. News posted in other forums do not display in the latest News block&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Show gradebook to students===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can decide whether to allow students to see the link to [[Grades|grades]] in the Administration block. If your course doesn&#039;t use graded activities, it makes sense to disable this. If grades are used and this link is disabled, students can still see their grade from the actual activity itself, such as an [[Assignment|assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Show activity reports===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can decide whether to show students their [[Activity_report#Individual_Activity_Report|activity reports]]. Doing so places a load on the server however, which is why the setting is disabled by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Files and uploads==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum upload size===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can decide the largest size of file that students can upload to a course.  The site administrator can determine [[Site_policies#Maximum_uploaded_file_sizefile |sizes available]] for the teacher to select. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Editing teachers or other users may be allowed to upload files larger than the maximum size by giving them the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:ignorefilesizelimits|moodle/course:ignorefilesizelimits]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Completion tracking==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Completion  tracking must be enabled for [[Activity completion]]. [[Course completion]] criteria may also be based upon Activity completion values found in the activity&#039;s settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Guest access==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:guestaccess25.png|thumb|Guest access settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can decide whether to allow logged in users to access the course as a guest, and whether or not they need to enter a password. See [[Guest role|Guest role]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Groups==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:coursegroups25.png|thumb|Groups settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
===Group mode===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can define the [[Groups|group mode]] at the course level by a pull down menu. &amp;quot;[[Groups#No_groups|No groups]]&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;[[Groups#Separate_groups|Separate groups]]&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;[[Groups#Visible_groups|Visible groups]]&amp;quot; are the choices. The selected setting will be the default group mode for all activities defined within that course.  The group setting can affect what users see in the [[Participants]] list and who they can interact with in activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Force===&lt;br /&gt;
If the group mode is &amp;quot;forced&amp;quot; at a course-level, then this particular group mode will be applied to every activity in that course. This will override any activities that may have a special group setting.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default grouping===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If [[Groupings|groupings]] are enabled, a default grouping for course activities and resources may be set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Role renaming==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:rolerenaming.png|thumb|Role renaming settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
You can rename the [[Roles|roles]] used in your course. For example, you may wish to rename the [[Teacher role]] as &amp;quot;Facilitator&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Tutor&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Guide&amp;quot;. These new role names will appear within the course. For example on the [[Participants|participants]] and the override permissions pages. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that the site administrator or a [[Manager |course manager]] may have changed the names or added new roles.  These names will appear and the teacher may rename them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can set course default settings in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Courses &amp;gt; Course default settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The maximum number of weeks/topics may be set for all courses on the site. The default value is 52.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preventing teachers from editing course settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any/all of the following fields - course full name, short name, ID number and category, summary - may be locked to prevent teachers from editing them. To do so:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Access &#039;&#039;Site Administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the edit icon opposite the teacher role.&lt;br /&gt;
#Change any/all of the capabilities [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changefullname|moodle/course:changefullname]], [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changeshortname|moodle/course:changeshortname]], [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changeidnumber|moodle/course:changeidnumber]], [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changecategory|moodle/course:changecategory]], [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changesummary|moodle/course:changesummary]] from allow to not set.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot; button at the bottom of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/vOm1NAknuvk Creating a Course and Course Settings] MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/rg6rUuBwITo Moodle 2 Administration Courses] MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Kurseinstellungen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Administración del curso]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Ikastaroaren_ezarpenak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Paramètres du cours]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:コース設定]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ru:course/edit]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Course_settings&amp;diff=107489</id>
		<title>Course settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Course_settings&amp;diff=107489"/>
		<updated>2014-01-25T03:13:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: /* See also */ Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Courses}}&lt;br /&gt;
A teacher, or other user with the [[Capabilities/moodle/course:update|update course settings capability]], can change course settings in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Edit settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:generalcourse25.png|thumb|General settings,expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Course full name===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the name of the course.  It is displayed as a link on course lists on the [[Front page]] and on [[My home]] and in reports.  It is also used in the browser title bar when the course is viewed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changefullname|moodle/course:changefullname]] controls whether a user can edit the course full name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Short name===&lt;br /&gt;
Many institutions have a shorthand way of referring to a course, such as BP102 or COMMS.  Even if you do not already have such a name for your course, make one up here.  It will be used in several places where the long name is not appropriate, such as the Navigation block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changeshortname|moodle/course:changeshortname]] controls whether a user can edit the short name field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, only course full names are displayed in the list of courses. However an administrator can enable short names to be displayed too if required by ticking the checkbox in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Courses&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Course category===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The site administrator may have created course categories to help teachers and students find their courses easily.  Course categories may be reflected in the [[Navigation block]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changecategory|moodle/course:changecategory]] controls whether a user can edit the course category.&lt;br /&gt;
===Course start date===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting affects the display of logs and the weekly format topic dates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you use the &amp;quot;Weekly&amp;quot; course format, the start date will appear in the first section of the course. For example selecting 27 July, will display &amp;quot;27 July - 2 August&amp;quot; in the first section (when default display is selected for that section).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting will have an effect on the display of logs. This will be the earliest possible date the log activity will display. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting will &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; affect courses using the &#039;social&#039; or &#039;topics&#039; formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; If your institution runs on a weekly schedule, you may want to consider setting the start date for courses on the first day of the week, like a Monday. Please note that the &#039;first day of the week&#039; is set by the [https://docs.moodle.org/dev/Translation_langconfig langconfig file] of your [[Language]], and might be different from the default Monday of the English language pack.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; In general, if your course does not have a real starting date then set the date to yesterday and use the availability setting to reveal the course to students.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; See self enrolment course settings to prevent students from entering the course before a certain date/time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Visible===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can &amp;quot;hide&amp;quot; your course completely. It will not appear on any course listings, except for managers, course creators, teachers and any other users with the [[Capabilities/moodle/course:viewhiddencourses|view hidden courses capability]]. Even if students try to access the course URL directly, they will not be allowed to enter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Capabilities/moodle/course:visibility|hide/show courses capability]] controls whether a user can hide a course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: In earlier versions of Moodle, this setting was named &#039;Course availability&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Course ID number===&lt;br /&gt;
The ID number is an alphanumeric field.  It has several potential uses.  Generally, it is not displayed to students.  However, it can be used to match this course against an external system&#039;s ID, as your course catalogue ID or can be used in the certificate module as a printed field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changeidnumber|moodle/course:changeidnumber]] controls whether a user can edit the ID number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Description==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:descriptioncourse25.png|thumb|Description settings expanded by default]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Course summary===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The summary appears on the course listings page.  This field is searched when searching for a course and also appears in the Course/Site description block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changesummary|moodle/course:changesummary]] controls whether a user can edit the course summary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Course summary files===&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
An image (and if allowed by the administrator, other file types) may be attached to the course summary. They will be accessible by anyone from outside of the course just like  the course name and/or summary. Only users with [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changesummary| moodle/course:changesummary capability]] are able to upload/change course summary files.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note that if this is not allowed by the administrator, then no box will appear to upload course summary files&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, only jpg, gif and png file types are allowed as course summary files. An administrator can change the allowed file types in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Courses&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Course format==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:coursefomat25.png|thumb|Course format settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Format===&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Course formats]]&lt;br /&gt;
===Number of sections===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting is only used by the &#039;weekly&#039; and &#039;topics&#039; course formats.  In the &#039;weekly&#039; format, it specifies the number of weeks that the course will run for, starting from the course starting date.  In the &#039;topics&#039; format, it specifies the number of topics in the course.  Both of these translate to the number of &amp;quot;boxes&amp;quot; down the middle of the course page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the number of weeks/topics is changed for an existing course so that the number is less than the number of course sections containing activities (for example the course contains activities in 3 sections and the number or weeks/topics is set to 2) then when editing is turned on section(s) at the bottom of the course page will be shown with the title &#039;Orphaned activities&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The number of weeks/topics may be set to 0, so that only the top general section is displayed on the course page and there are no numbered sections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the maximum number of weeks/topics is 52, but an administrator can set a different maximum number which will apply to all courses on the site (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
===Hidden sections===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows you to decide how the hidden sections in your course are displayed to students.  By default, a small area is shown (in collapsed form, usually grey) to indicate where the hidden section is, though they still cannot actually see the hidden activities and texts.  This is particularly useful in the Weekly format, so that non-class weeks are clear, or if you have quizzes you don&#039;t want your students to see.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; If you choose, these non-available items can be completely hidden, so that students do not even know  that sections or an activity in the course are hidden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Course layout===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Course layout setting determines whether the whole course is displayed on one page or split over several pages. The setting currently applies to the topics and weekly core course formats and contributed collapsed topics course format only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers choose from the dropdown whether they wish to &amp;quot;show all sections on one page&amp;quot; in the familiar scrolling format, or &amp;quot;show one section per page&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If one section per page is selected, the course page is abbreviated to a list of links to individual sections. If an individual section is shown, next and previous sections may be accessed via links above and below the section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:one section per page course format.png|thumb|Course page for course using one section per page course layout]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[File:Single_section_page.png|thumb|Individual section of a course using one section per page course layout]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Visit the School demo site course [http://school.demo.moodle.net/course/view.php?id=96 The Types of Sport] to see the &amp;quot;Show one section per page&amp;quot; course layout in action!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For further details plus screenshots, see blog post [http://www.somerandomthoughts.com/blog/2012/05/08/moodle-2-3-section-per-page/ Moodle 2.3 – Section per page] by Gavin Henrick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Appearance==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:appearancecourse252.png|thumb|Appearance settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Force theme===&lt;br /&gt;
If the site administrator has allowed the teacher to set a course [[Themes|theme]], this pull down menu will appear with a list of themes on the site.  Teachers can use this to choose a different look for the course from the rest of the Moodle site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Force language===&lt;br /&gt;
If you force a language in a course, the interface of Moodle in this course will be in this particular language, even if a student has selected a different preferred language in his/her personal profile.&lt;br /&gt;
===News items to show===&lt;br /&gt;
How many news items should show the [[Latest news block]].   Set it to 0 and Latest news block will not appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Latest News block relies on the use of the associated News Forum. News posted in other forums do not display in the latest News block&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Show gradebook to students===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can decide whether to allow students to see the link to [[Grades|grades]] in the Administration block. If your course doesn&#039;t use graded activities, it makes sense to disable this. If grades are used and this link is disabled, students can still see their grade from the actual activity itself, such as an [[Assignment|assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Show activity reports===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can decide whether to show students their [[Activity_report#Individual_Activity_Report|activity reports]]. Doing so places a load on the server however, which is why the setting is disabled by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Files and uploads==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum upload size===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can decide the largest size of file that students can upload to a course.  The site administrator can determine [[Site_policies#Maximum_uploaded_file_sizefile |sizes available]] for the teacher to select. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Editing teachers or other users may be allowed to upload files larger than the maximum size by giving them the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:ignorefilesizelimits|moodle/course:ignorefilesizelimits]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Completion tracking==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Completion  tracking must be enabled for [[Activity completion]]. [[Course completion]] criteria may also be based upon Activity completion values found in the activity&#039;s settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Guest access==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:guestaccess25.png|thumb|Guest access settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can decide whether to allow logged in users to access the course as a guest, and whether or not they need to enter a password. See [[Guest role|Guest role]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Groups==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:coursegroups25.png|thumb|Groups settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
===Group mode===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can define the [[Groups|group mode]] at the course level by a pull down menu. &amp;quot;[[Groups#No_groups|No groups]]&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;[[Groups#Separate_groups|Separate groups]]&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;[[Groups#Visible_groups|Visible groups]]&amp;quot; are the choices. The selected setting will be the default group mode for all activities defined within that course.  The group setting can affect what users see in the [[Participants]] list and who they can interact with in activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Force===&lt;br /&gt;
If the group mode is &amp;quot;forced&amp;quot; at a course-level, then this particular group mode will be applied to every activity in that course. This will override any activities that may have a special group setting.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default grouping===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If [[Groupings|groupings]] are enabled, a default grouping for course activities and resources may be set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Role renaming==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:rolerenaming.png|thumb|Role renaming settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
You can rename the [[Roles|roles]] used in your course. For example, you may wish to rename the [[Teacher role]] as &amp;quot;Facilitator&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Tutor&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Guide&amp;quot;. These new role names will appear within the course. For example on the [[Participants|participants]] and the override permissions pages. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that the site administrator or a [[Manager |course manager]] may have changed the names or added new roles.  These names will appear and the teacher may rename them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can set course default settings in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Courses &amp;gt; Course default settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The maximum number of weeks/topics may be set for all courses on the site. The default value is 52.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preventing teachers from editing course settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Any/all of the following fields - course full name, short name, ID number and category, summary - may be locked to prevent teachers from editing them. To do so:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Access &#039;&#039;Site Administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the edit icon opposite the teacher role.&lt;br /&gt;
#Change any/all of the capabilities [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changefullname|moodle/course:changefullname]], [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changeshortname|moodle/course:changeshortname]], [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changeidnumber|moodle/course:changeidnumber]], [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changecategory|moodle/course:changecategory]], [[Capabilities/moodle/course:changesummary|moodle/course:changesummary]] from allow to not set.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot; button at the bottom of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/vOm1NAknuvk Creating a Course and Course Settings] MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Kurseinstellungen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Administración del curso]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Ikastaroaren_ezarpenak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Paramètres du cours]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:コース設定]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ru:course/edit]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Site_appearance&amp;diff=107479</id>
		<title>Site appearance</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Site_appearance&amp;diff=107479"/>
		<updated>2014-01-19T01:47:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Cttxg: Adding MoodleBites YouTube video link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Managing a Moodle site}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are many ways to customise the appearance of your Moodle site so that it blends in with, for example, your college site or your company&#039;s corporate brand. The links below provide more information on personalising the appearance of Moodle:&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Front page]] - how best to display the entry page to your Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[My home]] - a personalised &amp;quot;dashboard&amp;quot; page for each user&lt;br /&gt;
*[[User profiles]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Navigation]] - control how users find their way around Moodle&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Course list]] - control who appears in the list of courses&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Themes]] - change the &amp;quot;skin&amp;quot; of your Moodle for the whole site or just sections.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Header and footer]] - add information to the top and bottom areas of your Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://youtu.be/05eW0NzDi_c Moodle 2 Appearance Administration settings] MoodleBites video on YouTube&lt;br /&gt;
*Change the language or default wording on your site - [[Language|Language]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Darstellung]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Cttxg</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>